2017 RAM 1500-2500-3500 Truck Owner's Manual

2017 RAM TRUCK 1500/2500/3500
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
RAM TRUCK
2017
1500/2500/3500
17D241-126-AG
OWNER’S MANUAL
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Seventh Edition
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Printed in U.S.A.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA features and equipment that are either standard or op- INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a EQUIPMENT
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.
accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle. equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- The positive power connection should be made directly
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
normal may require special precautions.
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- The negative power connection should be made to body
portation. factured. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the
WARNING! vehicle’s electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. vehicles so equipped.
Copyright © 2021 FCA US LLC
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 8

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . .7
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION If applicable, refer to the Diesel Supplement for diesel
related information.
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC ve-
hicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
distinctive styling, and high quality. be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read satisfaction.
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
INTRODUCTION 5
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects. 1
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire. Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra- Owner’s Manual:
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS Operating instructions for the special equipment installed
by the conversion/camper manufacturer should also be
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions are miss-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
ing, please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
obtaining replacement documents from the applicable
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
manufacturer.
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau- For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to
tions. www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimen-
sional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It is
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical sup-
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body port. For service issues, contact your authorized dealer.
modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. U.S.
residents refer to the Warranty Information book, Section
2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Cov-
ered” section of the Warranty Information book. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, stoves,
refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on
these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through WARNING!
the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Informa- seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
tion Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) And Key Fob — If ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition And Key Fob — If
䡵 ILLUMINATED APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Key Fobs — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Remote Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Removing Key Fob From The (WIN) Ignition . . .15
▫ To Lock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The Vehicle)
▫ Replacement Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
— If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Customer Key Fob Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .28 ▫ Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ How To Use Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . . .41
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The ▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . . .55
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .30
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .94
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY . . . . .35
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or
keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system 2
consists of a either a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) system,
or a Keyless Push Button Ignition system.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) And Key Fob — If
Equipped
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions
are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released Wireless Ignition Switch
from the START position, the switch automatically returns 1 — OFF
to the ON/RUN position. 2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Key Fob Keyless Push Button Ignition And Key Fob — If
The key fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the square Equipped
end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. The with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless
WIN key fob also contains an emergency key which is Entry key fob is in the passenger compartment.
stored in the rear of the key fob. The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start RUN
will illuminate.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Key Fob

NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with Keyless Push Button Ignition Key Fob
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead The keyless push button ignition key fob allows the driver
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as 2
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment. It also
of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE contains an emergency key which is stored in the rear of
START/STOP button, with your foot applied on the brake
the key fob.
pedal, and push to operate the ignition switch.
Keyless Push Button Ignition Key Fob
Keyless Push Button Ignition

1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
Key Fobs — If Equipped
The key fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the square
end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the
instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also
contains the key fob and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch at
the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb and then
pull the key out with your other hand. Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to This Keyless Push Button Ignition key fob allows the driver
your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as
triggered. Insert the key into the ignition and place the long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment. The
ignition in the ON/RUN mode to disarm the security Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions,
system. three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN.
The fourth position is START, during start RUN will
illuminate. It also contains the key fob and an emergency
key, which stores in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From The (WIN) Ignition
on the backside of the key fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand. 2
NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to
your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be
triggered. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emer-
gency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE START/
STOP button and push to disarm the security system.
Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (WIN)

Place the gear selector in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission). Turn the key fob to the OFF
position and then remove the key fob.
Key Fob Emergency Key

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the door lock cylinder with either side up.
NOTE:
WARNING! (Continued)
• The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
feature. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, selector.
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display⬙ in “Understanding • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
Panel” for further information. brake pedal or gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
WARNING! a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
into REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the
vehicle.
vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs from the vehicle,
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
and lock all doors. If equipped with Keyless Enter-
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition node is
cause serious injury or death.
in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• ⬙Keyed⬙ Ignition systems will chime in OFF or ACC
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your when the driver door is open. 2
key fobs will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the key fobs while in this • “Keyless⬙ Ignition systems will chime in ACC or RUN
condition, damage could occur to the key fobs or when the driver door is open.
ignition module. Only remove the emergency key for • The instrument cluster display will display “Key In
locking and unlocking the doors. Ignition.”
• Leave the key fob in the ignition and either:
General Information
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery. The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
CAUTION! This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
the key from the ignition and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Key-In-Ignition Reminder 2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
Opening the driver’s door when the key fob is in the tion.
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, a
chime will sound to remind you to remove the key fob. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY an invalid key fob to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
seconds.
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
unlocked. indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
The system uses a key fob, an Ignition Node Module,
authorized dealer.
Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and CAUTION!
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
crank if an invalid key fob is used to start and operate the with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine. and loss of security protection.
NOTE: A key fob that has not been programmed is also
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
considered an invalid key.
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
During normal operation, after placing the keyless ignition
Replacement Key Fobs
in the ON/RUN position, the vehicle security light will
turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used programmed to any other vehicle.
General Information
CAUTION!
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: 2
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
the OFF position.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an 2. This device must accept any interference received, includ-
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, user’s authority to operate the equipment.
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
Customer Key Fob Programming
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors and
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
ignition for unauthorized operation. When the vehicle
dealer.
security alarm is activated, interior switches for door locks
are disabled. The system provides both audible and visible
signals for the first three minutes. The horn will sound, the
headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals
will flash and vehicle security light will flash repeatedly.
For an additional 15 minutes only, the headlights will turn
on, the park lamps and/or turn signals, and vehicle
security light will flash.
Rearming Of The System • Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
The vehicle security alarm will rearm itself after the 15
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter- N-Go — Passive
additional minutes of headlights and vehicle security light
Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
flashing, if the system has not been disabled. If the condi-
hicle⬙ for further information).
tion which initiated the alarm is still present, the system
will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors • Push the lock button on the key fob.
and ignition. 3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Arm The System The vehicle security alarm will set when you use the power
door locks, or use the key fob to lock the doors. After all the
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
doors are locked and closed, the vehicle security light, in
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to the instrument panel cluster, will flash rapidly for about 16
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After the
further information). alarm is set, the vehicle security light will flash at a slower
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — rate to indicate that the system is armed.
Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is To Disarm The System
⬙OFF.⬙
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is the following methods:
⬙OFF⬙ and the key is physically removed from the 1. Push the unlock button on the key fob.
ignition.
2. Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry door
vehicle: handle. If equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go —
• Push lock button on the interior power door lock Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open. Vehicle⬙ for further information.
3. Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position. ILLUMINATED APPROACH
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
Ignition, push the Keyless Ignition START/STOP but- to unlock the doors or open any door. 2
ton (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Un-
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
key to the ON position.
information.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the “Dome ON” position (rotate vertical thumb wheel all the
vehicle security alarm. way to the top detent).
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position (rotate
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior vertical thumb wheel all the way to the bottom detent).
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated ap-
proach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be turned
Security System Manual Override off by moving the instrument panel dimmer into the
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the “Dome Defeat” detent position.
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
The Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors, tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped) as
well as activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a key fob with integrated
key. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system. Push and release the lock button on
the key fob to lock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox
(if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and the horn
will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
NOTE: Inserting the key fob with integrated key into the
ignition switch disables the system from responding to any WIN Key Fob With Integrated Key
button pushes from that key fob. Driving at speeds 5 MPH
(8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding
to all key fob buttons for all key fobs.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock 2
button on the key fob. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display/Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Passive Entry Key Fob Panel” for further information.
Remote Unlock The Doors NOTE: Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to are inside the vehicle will activate the vehicle security
unlock the driver’s door. Push the unlock button twice alarm system. Opening a door with the vehicle security
within five seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and the alarm system activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push
RamBox (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash to the unlock button to deactivate the vehicle security alarm
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system.
system will also turn on.
NOTE: The instrument cluster display or Uconnect Set-
tings are setup for driver door first, otherwise this will
unlock all doors.
Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock • For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display/Settings
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows: • For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display/Settings Panel” for further information.
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding NOTE: Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. are in the vehicle will activate the vehicle security alarm
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to system. Opening a door with the vehicle security alarm
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument system activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the
Panel” for further information. unlock button to deactivate the vehicle security alarm
system.
To Lock The Doors
Using The Panic Alarm
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). The turn To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowl- the panic button on the key fob for at least one second and
edge the signal. release. When the panic alarm is on, the headlights will
turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock and off, and the turn signal lights will flash.
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are The panic alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or turn it off by either pushing the panic button a second time
turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
follows:
NOTE: • The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition • All doors must be closed.
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the panic 2
• The key fob must be out of the vehicle.
alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn
will remain on. Cancelling Remote Lowering
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the Vehicle lowering can be cancelled at anytime. When vehicle
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the panic lowering is cancelled, the vehicle will raise up to the next
alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the defined level and lock out the remote lowering feature
system. until the ignition has been cycled ON/OFF.
Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The Vehicle) To cancel vehicle lowering, push the key fob air suspension
— If Equipped lowering button one time during the lowering process.
When vehicle lowering is cancelled, the horn will chirp two
times and the turn signal lamps will flash four times. Once
For easy entry and loading, your vehicle can be raising is completed, the horn will chirp one time.
lowered by pushing the key fob air suspension
lowering button two times. When key fob low- NOTE: Refer to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting And
ering is requested, the vehicle will send a series Operating” for further information.
of chirps and flashes to alert the customer that the opera- Programming Additional Key Fobs
tion has begun and will continue these alerts until it
successfully lowers. If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
The following conditions must be met for the vehicle to
lower remotely: Key Fob Battery Replacement
• The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit (Park) The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
ride height. battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
Emergency WIN Key Removal

2. Separating key fob halves requires screw removal – if
equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the key
fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during 2
removal.
Separating WIN Key Fob Case
Remove Screw From Key Fob Case

General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
tion.
Separating Key Fob Case NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over by the party responsible for compliance could void the
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a user’s authority to operate the equipment.
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new This system uses the key fob to start the engine
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with maintaining security. The system has a range of
rubbing alcohol. approximately 300 ft (91 m).
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together, reposition and secure the screw as shown in
step #2 for removal.
NOTE: • Vehicle security alarm not active
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start. WARNING! 2
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
reduce this range. confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
How To Use Remote Start
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
All of the following conditions must be met before the or death when inhaled.
engine will remote start: • Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
• Gear selector in PARK Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
• Doors closed
• Hood closed Remote Start Abort Message
• HAZARD switch off The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed) remote start prematurely:
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch • Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Battery at an acceptable charge level • Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• PANIC button not pushed • Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Fuel meets minimum requirement • Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
• System not disabled from previous remote start event • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active until To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position. Vehicle
To Enter Remote Start Mode Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash, NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will
vehicle doors will lock, and the horn will chirp twice (if disable the one time push of the Remote Start button for
programmed). Once the vehicle has started, the engine will two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
run for 15 minutes.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
NOTE: Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
will automatically lock the doors. disarm the vehicle security alarm system (if equipped).
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, cycle the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. ignition to the ON/RUN position.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
Remote Start mode. When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering wheel
• For security, power window and power sunroof opera- and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
Remote Start mode. feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is
activated. These features will stay on through the duration
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is turned to the
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the igni- ON/RUN position.
tion must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and DOOR LOCKS
deactivated through the Uconnect System. Refer to
Manual Door Locks
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument 2
Panel” for further information on Remote Start Comfort Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock
System operation. knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
tion.
Door Lock Knob
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without lifting the lock knob.
Doors locked before closing will remain locked when
closed.
The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on
your vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
WARNING! dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may brake pedal or the gear selector.
cause serious injury or death. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
• For personal security and safety in the event of an a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
as when you park and leave the vehicle. N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic operate power windows, other controls, or move the
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission vehicle.
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs Power Door Locks — If Equipped
from vehicle, and lock all doors. and lock your The power door lock switches are on each front door trim
vehicle. panel. Use these switches to lock or unlock the doors.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a NOTE: The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
selector.
(Continued)
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when 2
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. The auto door lock feature is enabled/
disabled in the Uconnect Settings.
Automatic Doors Unlock — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
either front door is opened. This will occur only after the
vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the
Power Door Lock Switches Location vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all doors
If you push the power door lock switch while the key fob closed).
is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
Automatic Doors Unlock Programming — If
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally
Equipped
locking your key fob in the vehicle. Removing the key fob
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A chime The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be enabled or
will sound if the key fob is in the ignition switch and a door disabled as follows:
is open, as a reminder to remove the key fob. • For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to
Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accordance
with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle have
the Child-Protection Door Lock system.
Child Lock Control
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location Remember that the sliding doors cannot be opened
from the inside door handle when the Child Protection
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
Door Locks are engaged.
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to
engage and disengage the Child-Protection locks. When
the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
NOTE: NOTE:
• After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system, • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
always test the door from the inside to make certain it is “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument 2
in the desired position. Panel” for further information.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
door lock switch to the unlock position, roll down the raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
window and open the door with the outside door unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
handle. response time.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehi- if equipped will arm the security alarm.
cle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting • The vehicles security alarm can be armed/disarmed by
And Operating” for further information. This feature al- pushing the passive entry key fob lock/unlock buttons
lows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without (if equipped).
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. • The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side: To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle to passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door handle to unlock all doors automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked. panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle:
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
vehicle for any valid Passive Entry key fobs. If one of the
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is detected inside the
vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry key fobs are
detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System
automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn
three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and
the Passive Entry key fob can be locked in the vehicle). 2
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
the door handle lock button to lock all doors.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle lock button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is
done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door • The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s). battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob WINDOWS
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
Power Windows — If Equipped
interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
tion.
Power Window Switches
The power window controls located on the driver’s door
trim panel have up-down switches that give you fingertip
control of all power windows. There is a single opening
and closing switch on the front passenger door for passen-
ger window control and on the rear doors of the Quad Cab
and Crew Cab models. The windows will operate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC position,
and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or
until a front door is opened.
NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the To open the window part way, push to the switch to the
power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the first detent and release it when you want the window to
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when stop. 2
either front door is opened.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection (4-Door
Models Driver And Front Passenger Door Only) —
WARNING! If Equipped
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not Pull the window switch fully upward to the second detent,
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location release, and the window will go up automatically.
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the To stop the window from going all the way up during the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unat- Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
tended children, can become entrapped by the win- To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
dows while operating the power window switches. the first detent and release when you want the window to
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. stop.
Auto-Down NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the
Auto-Closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
Both the driver and front passenger window switch have
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch
an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road
first detent, release, and the window will go down auto-
conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpect-
matically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the
edly during auto closure. If this happens, pull the switch
switch in either the up or down direction and release the
lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window
switch.
manually.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
down position. To enable the window controls, push the
WARNING!
window lock switch again and return the switch to the
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is released or up position.
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
Window Lockout Switch
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds Wind Buffeting
after the window is fully open. Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
Window Lockout Switch (4–Door Models Only) pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
you to disable the window control on the rear passenger partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
doors. To disable the window controls on the rear passen- can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
ger doors, push the window lock switch into the latched or windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
minimize the buffeting.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child 2
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
are the restraint systems: further information).
Occupant Restraint Systems Features 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
• Seat Belt Systems belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
• Child Restraints booster seats. Older children who do not use child
Some of the safety features described in this section may be restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho- 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
rized dealer. them or under their arm.
Important Safety Precautions 5. You should read the instructions provided with your
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. child restraint to make sure that you are using it
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to properly.
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the der belts properly.
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved Seat Belt Systems
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
to inflate. short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air far away from home or on your own street.
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu- Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
pants and the door and occupants could be injured. reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “If You vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
Need Consumer Assistance” section for customer ser- risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
vice contact information. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
WARNING!
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
restraint.
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Initial Indication driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
to buckle their seat belts.
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for 2
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen- Change Of Status
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
led again.
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck- pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is cargo is properly stowed.
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivat-
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
ing BeltAlert.
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
Lap/Shoulder Belts vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
All seating positions except the Quad Cab, Mega Cab and vehicle are buckled up properly.
Crew Cab front center seating position have combination • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
lap/shoulder belts. of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
being thrown out of the vehicle. or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
WARNING! death in the event of a crash.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
(Continued) (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Two people should never be belted into a single seat • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
belt. People belted together can crash into one an- not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride 2
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never too high on your body, possibly causing internal
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
person, no matter what their size. buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
WARNING! properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of your seat belt snugly.
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
as low as possible and keep it snug. injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
your authorized dealer immediately and have it you from injury during a collision. You are more
fixed. likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
(Continued) are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat. Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull any slack in the shoulder belt.
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the Adjustable Anchorage
latch plate.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the that it is locked in position.
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is First Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the (Regular Cab Only)
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only) features a 2
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked is folded. The latch plate and regular latch plate can then be
into position. stored out of the way in the seat for added convenience to
open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front
WARNING! seats when the seat is not occupied.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your 1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer from its stowed position on the seat.
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Inserting Latch Plate

6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in
a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
In Use Position 9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the buckle.
seat.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center
restraint. red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automati-
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the cally retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt
“click.” to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate into its stowed position.
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. 2
If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini-
latch plate and mini-buckle.
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating Instructions —

If Equipped
The center seating position for the Quad Cab, Mega Cab
Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle the
lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
WARNING! a ⬙click.⬙ To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and
pull.
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back and upright in
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in the seat, then adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfort-
a collision. able.
(Continued)
Seat Belt Extender Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
when worn, the distance between the front edge of Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can wearing a seat belt.
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
recommended seating positions. Remove and store across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) —
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning If Equipped
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are 2
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
occupants, including those in child restraints. Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
locking feature for each seating position.
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
Quad Cab/Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
restraint.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR with a rear seat.
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of the entire seat belt is extracted.
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat Some of the safety features described in this section may be
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. standard equipment on some models, or may be optional 2
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock- collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
ing mode. tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
WARNING! Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea- Air Bag System Components
ture or any other seat belt function is not working • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
properly when checked according to the procedures • Air Bag Warning Light
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in- • Steering Wheel and Column
crease the risk of injury in collisions. • Instrument Panel
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children • Knee Impact Bolsters
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child. • Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
• Seat Belt Pretensioners The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
Air Bag Warning Light tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the bag system immediately.
ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the air bags will not inflate. the ON/RUN position.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or eight-second interval.
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the remains on while driving.
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn- Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime immediately.
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument 2
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. 2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag WARNING!
covers. • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or vanced Front Air Bags.
restraint. WARNING!
with a rear seat. • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output inflate.
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter- • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if the air bags and you could be injured because the air
equipped) or other system components. bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an only when the air bags are inflating.
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
output is used for more severe collisions. your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not 2
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub- the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli- inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little Knee Impact Bolsters
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
deceleration.
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have WARNING!
deployed.
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, bolsters in any way.
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
from an inflating air bag. bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Side Air Bags When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR- are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
2
WARNING!
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the SABIC
and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
Label Location
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
body structure. activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win- The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
WARNING!
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
WARNING! of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
killed.
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
they are in an infant or child restraint.
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
Side Air Bags.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re- Side Impacts
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
appropriate for the size of the child. determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretension-
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the ers, with or without the Side Air Bags, on both sides of the
right Side Air Bags only. vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event. 2
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger certain rollover or side impact events.
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
deploy.
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Rollover Events
Air Bag System Components
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro- • Air Bag Warning Light
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle • Steering Wheel and Column
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
• Instrument Panel
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
• Knee Impact Bolsters
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A • Supplemental Side Air Bags
slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
sioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-developing • Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the • Seat Belt Pretensioners
Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
deployment.
cleaning.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
air bag system.
not be in place to protect you.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur: WARNING!
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
serviced as well.
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your NOTE:
doctor immediately.
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like but they will open during air bag deployment.
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
authorized dealer immediately.
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
Enhanced Accident Response System Maintaining Your Air Bag System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending WARNING! 2
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
the following functions: injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
• Cut off fuel to the engine. you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
button.
side steps or running boards.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
the battery has power. system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
• Unlock the power door locks. your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
Procedure not function properly if modifications are made.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart- attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine. (Continued)
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
system for persons with disabilities, contact your non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
authorized dealer. the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
Event Data Recorder (EDR) recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
gation.
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
record such data as: EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Child Restraints There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
times, including babies and children. Every state in the adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s 2
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
seats rather than in the front. dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
WARNING! NOTE:
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a • For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
even an infant on your lap could become so great that • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you website for additional information: http://
are. The child and others could be badly injured or www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a childsafety-index-53.htm
proper restraint for the child’s size.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Recommended Type of Child Re-

Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
straint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
younger and who have not reached ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
the height or weight limits of their in the rear seat of the vehicle
child restraint
Small Children Children who are at least two years Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
old or who have out-grown the a five-point Harness, facing forward
height or weight limit of their rear- in the rear seat of the vehicle
facing child restraint
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
forward-facing child restraint, but vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
are too small to properly fit the vehi- seat of the vehicle
cle’s seat belt
Children Too Large for Child Re- Children 12 years old or younger, Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
straints who have out-grown the height or seat of the vehicle
weight limit of their booster seat
Infant And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an 2
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear- death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It with a rear seat.
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it for children who are over two years old or who have
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
child may be more severely injured as a result. rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
WARNING!
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over 2
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
when installing an infant or child restraint. belt alone:
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be- 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments. vehicle seat?
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve- 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. back?
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in tween their neck and arm?
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious child’s thighs and not their stomach?
personal injury.
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
WARNING!
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of will not protect a child properly, which may result in
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Weight of the LATCH – Lower Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top
Child + Child Anchors Only Anchors + Top Tether Anchor
Restraint Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing More than 65 lbs X
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Forward-Facing More than 65 lbs X
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
Restraint System system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three 2
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
LATCH Label
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Crew/Mega Cabs 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions

• Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Regular Cab LATCH Positions • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Quad Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions Quad/Crew Cabs Full Bench LATCH Positions
• Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per • Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position) Seating Position)
• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
weight + weight of the child re- until the combined weight of the
straint) for using the LATCH anchor- child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
age system to attach the child re- (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
straint? anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the No Do not use the seat belt when you
seat belt be used together to attach a use the LATCH anchorage system to
rear-facing or forward-facing child attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
restraint? child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the
LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for
more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the No Quad Cab or Crew with Full bench
center position using the inner rear seat: Use the seat belt and tether
LATCH lower anchorages? anchor to install a child seat in the
center seating position
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Can two child restraints be attached No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
using a common lower LATCH an- with two or more child restraints. If 2
chorage? the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat
in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes The child seat may touch the back of
touch the back of the front passenger the front passenger seat if the child
seat? restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint own-
er’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints can be removed
in each seating position.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Regular Cab models have tether strap anchor-
The lower anchorages are round bars that are ages behind the front center and right seats.
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it Quad Cab, Mega Cab and Crew Cab models
meets the seatback. They are just visible when have tether strap anchorages located behind each
you lean into the rear seat to install the child of the rear seats.
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages

Quad Cab/Mega Cab/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats
Driver Side 1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
Center Seat LATCH
Quad Cab Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat: No Lower
Center LATCH Anchorages Available 2
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not ap-
proved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
Mega Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers) • Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical in-
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower stallation instructions.
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Mega Cab Or Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
LATCH Anchorages Available If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, type of seat belt each seating position has.
do not install a child seat in that outboard position. 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
WARNING! attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more ages.
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical instal- that seating position. For some second row seats, you
lation instructions. may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
2
tions to attach a tether anchor. straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
that they should not play with them.
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
WARNING!
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It • Improper installation of a child restraint to the
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
direction. straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Seat Belt: • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and other items or equipment to the vehicle.
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
Belt equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
lap/shoulder belt. the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
WARNING!
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
child could be badly injured or killed. the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is designed to
hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight when webbing is
pulled tight and straight through a child restraint’s belt
path.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
2
Quad Cab/Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) Locations
• Cinch = Cinching Latch Plate
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child re- using the seat belt to install a for-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor ward facing child restraint, up to the
with the seat belt to attach a forward recommended weight limit of the
facing child restraint? child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front passenger
touch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is al-
seat? lowed, if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints can be removed
in each seating position.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to Yes In positions with cinching latch
tighten the seat belt against the belt plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk may
path of the child restraint? be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not
twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable For Regular Cab Models
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in Move the vehicle seat as far rearward as possible to keep 2
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a the child as far from the advanced passenger air bag as
lap/shoulder belt. possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
WARNING! to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
child could be badly injured or killed. “click.”
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
1. For Crew, Mega, And Quad Cab Models
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make the Automatic Locking mode.
room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat. 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch
portion around the child restraint while you push the Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
seat. vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the lap/shoulder belt.
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether WARNING!
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a • Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
tether anchor. child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction. 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
“click.” belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap 2
the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-
portion around the child restraint while you push the
end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
plate into the buckle with the release button facing out,
seat.
away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the complete the installation of the child restraint.
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate into
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
tether anchor.
installation tight, try a different seating position.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should
not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether mega cab truck, the top tether anchorages are located
Anchorage behind each rear seating position. There is a plastic cover
over each anchorage. To attach the tether strap of the child
WARNING! restraint:
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to 1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether head restraint and to the tether anchor directly behind
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage the seat.
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages

Regular And Mega Cab Trucks:
1 — Tether Strap Hook
In the regular cab truck, the top tether anchorages are 2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
located behind the center and right passenger seats. In the 3 — Tether Anchor
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
WARNING!
between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether
strap should go between the head restraint posts under- Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an 2
neath the head restraint. You may need to adjust the air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
head restraint to the upward position to pass the tether Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
strap underneath the head restraint and between its or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
posts. restraint.
3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to the Quad Cab Or Crew Cab Trucks:
square opening in the sheet metal. Tighten the tether
strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instruc- The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether strap
tions. loops located between the rear glass and the back of the
rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located behind each
seating position. Follow the steps below to attach the tether
strap of the child restraint.
Mega Cab Tether Anchorages

Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat
and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In Raised

Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
Head Restraint In Raised Position
head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the
seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the center
seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint
behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the center tether strap loop. 2
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And

Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
NOTE: If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks of both
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see child seats should be connected to the center tether strap
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child loop. This is the correct way to tether two outboard child
seat manufacturer’s instructions. seats.
Center Seat: 3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint
behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat
behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard
and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position

Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the
seat and over to the tether strap loop behind either the
right or left outboard seat.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop (see 3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. Route the
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child tether strap following the directions for the center
seat manufacturer’s instructions. seating position, above. 2
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions, tightening the right and
left tether straps before the center tether strap.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And

Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat. Route
the tether straps following the directions for right and
Left Outboard And Center Seating Position Shown
left seating positions, above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop, but do
not tighten the straps yet.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
WARNING!
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to or 90 km/h) are desirable.
increased head motion and possible injury to the While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be- limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
tether strap. mental and should be avoided.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
in the strap. should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
Transporting Pets mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a CAUTION!
collision. Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or in the engine or damage may result.
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break in period.
Add oil as required.
SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
WARNING! 2
NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
WARNING! monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may these safety tips:
cause serious injury or death. • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, confined areas any longer than needed to move your
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people vehicle in or out of the area.
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
injured or killed. rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
using a seat belt properly. engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the

vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam- chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex- driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems”
or oil change. Replace as required. for further information.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Defroster
Seat Belts Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
able.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web- Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
retractor condition, replace the seat belt. unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or
Air Bag Warning Light
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked • ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the 2
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
• ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten- trunk.
ers on a regular basis. • ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT passenger’s side floor area.
FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any other • ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
vehicle control.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Lights
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re- Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for panel.
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch Door Latches
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check Fluid Leaks
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
by lightly pulling mat.
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
The Vehicle should be located and corrected immediately.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 3
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 ▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . .115
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .104 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .116
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . .104 ▫ “Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Camera Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .109 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . .119
▫ Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped. . . . .111 ▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard And ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Trailer Tow — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped . . . . . . . .123
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ 40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . . .124
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
▫ Mega Cab Rear Seat Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .130 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . .131 ▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Key Fob To Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped . . .143
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . .136
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . .145
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped .137
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Headlight Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .139 ▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .160
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .149 ▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .160
䡵 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — 䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 3
䡵 SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 ▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 ▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ To Set A Desired Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 ▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 ▫ Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear
ParkSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . . .166
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .167
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .171
▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .172
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . . .173
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .159
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . .176 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . . .177 䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
䡵 AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .188
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ Front Seat Cupholders (40–20–40 Seats) . . . . . . .188
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor Storage
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .181
Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Rear Cupholders — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped . . .193
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin —
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 ▫ Seatback Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Storage (Regular Cab). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 ▫ RamBox Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Storage and Seats (Crew Cab/Quad Cab) . . . . . .197 ▫ Bed Extender — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers ▫ Bed Rail Tie-Down System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
(Regular Cab Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 3
䡵 SLIDE-IN CAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Camper Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
䡵 EASY-OFF TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . . .199
▫ Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or Remote Keyless
▫ Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . .199 Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
䡵 FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED . . . .199 ▫ Removing The Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
䡵 PICKUP BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 ▫ Locking Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ Cargo Camera — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 䡵 TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED . .219
▫ Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off — With Uconnect ▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . .219
8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation . . . . . . . . . .223
䡵 RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins. . . . . .205
▫ Locking And Unlocking RamBox . . . . . . . . . . . .207
MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
on the view through the rear window.
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window. This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the viewing.
windshield).
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned on
or off through the touchscreen.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the feature
on.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature off.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror

NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if you 3
are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable
if your Uconnect Access service is active and you are
connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
Automatic Dimming Mirror any one of the following support centers:
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
9-1-1 button.
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
WARNING!
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1 • Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support for
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable Uconnect Access.
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
9-1-1 Call
WARNING!
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the rearview mirror.
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error, road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the rearview
mirror or press the cancellation button on the device NOTE:
screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off the green • Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
LED light on the rearview mirror. by the subscriber.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1 • Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made. may be able to open a voice connection with the
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 op- vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able
erator: to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call. Call system will attempt to remain connected with the
• The vehicle brand. 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the
connection.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
tional help is needed.

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1 AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, 3
operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle im- APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
mediately and move to a safe location. NOT OPERATE.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper- • Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
able 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
antennas. You could prevent operable 1X(voice/data) it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception, there to help protect you.
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an 9-1-1 Call System Limitations
emergency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is re- Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
quired for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly. Call system capabilities.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s 9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that following may occur at the time the malfunction is de-
can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add tected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, • The rearview mirror light located between the ASSIST
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electri- and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
cal system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
(Continued)
• The device screen will display the following message • The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
dealer.”
damaged during a crash.
• An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle device
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
nected during a vehicle crash.
WARNING! • 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global Po-
sitioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could mean you
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the rearview
mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer • Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately. • 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network congestion.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a • Weather.
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If • Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint WARNING!
Control system immediately.
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
limited to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber. To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X(voice/ Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the 3
data) or 3G(data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent mirror clean.
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emer- Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
gency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) Display — If Equipped
network connection and a GPS signal is required for the
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
General Information The mirror installs on the windshield button with a coun-
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. terclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
this device must accept any interference received, includ- on the view through the rear window.
ing interference that may cause undesired operation. This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved vehicles behind you.
When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear, a video Outside Mirrors
display illuminates to display the image generated by the To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to
rear view camera located on the tailgate handle. The auto center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
dimming feature is also disabled to improve rear view the view obtained on the inside mirror.
viewing.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated ap-
proach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be turned
off through the instrument cluster display or the Uconnect
radio. For further information, refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” and “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel”.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles will
not have a convex passenger side mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manually Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside
folded both forward and rearward to prevent damage. mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position 3
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored
memory setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors in
Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature
can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to
Folding Mirror “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
CAUTION! If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under-
rearward position to resist damage when entering a car standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
wash or a narrow location.
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard And
Trailer Tow — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located be-
tween the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push the
switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the
normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled, a
potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors Power Folding Mirror Switch
back to the home position. If the mirror does not electri- Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
cally fold, check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
which can cause excessive drag.
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
To Reset The Power Folding Mirrors: Power Mirrors — If Equipped
1. Using the power folding mirror switch, move the mirror The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
to its full forward position. driver’s door trim panel.
2. Using the power folding mirror switch, move the mirror 3
to the full retract position (this may require multiple
button pushes). This resets them to their normal posi-
tion.
NOTE:
• The power fold mirrors are designed to operate while
the vehicle is stationary or traveling at moderate speeds.
If you attempt to power fold the mirrors at high speeds
they may not fully open or close. You should slow down
to a moderate speed and complete the operation.
• When pushing the power fold button 10 or more times
Power Mirror Controls Location
in one minute the system shuts down for one minute to
protect the motors from over heating.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right)
and a four-way mirror control switch. button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Controls

1 — Mirror Select Buttons
2 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch Power Mirror Movement
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This to provide a greater vision range when towing extra-wide
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Win- head should be rotated (flipped in or out). 3
dow Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automati-
cally adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror
adjusts.
Trailer Towing Position

NOTE: Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
entering an automated car wash. Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor. To
A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror and use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
can be adjusted separately. mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
Blindspot Mirror
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If SEATS
Equipped Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional vehicle.
flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun.
WARNING! 3
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired posi- outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
tion. these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way power The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
driver’s seat. The power seat switches are located on the the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion. There are two the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
power seat switches that are used to control the movement desired position has been reached.
of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or
rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Power Seat Switches Reclining The Seatback
1 — Power Seat Switch The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
2 — Power Seatback Switch rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
WARNING!
Some models are equipped with a six-way power passen-
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. ger seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of side of the seat. The switch is used to control the movement
control which could cause a collision and serious of the seat and seat cushion. 3
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. desired position has been reached.
In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
WARNING!
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar tion or other physical condition must exercise care
support. when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Front Heated Seats

The front heated seats control buttons are located on the
center instrument panel below the climate controls.
Lumbar Control Switch If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front
Heated Seats — If Equipped heated seats control buttons are also located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped
with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs. • Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
• Press the heated seat button a second time to turn If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
the LO setting on. feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under-
• Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
heating elements off.
Rear Heated Seats 3
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these seats
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will are located on the rear of the center console.
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
passengers to operate the seats independently. You can
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator
LO-level setting will turn off automatically after approxi-
lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two
mately 45 minutes.
indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to for OFF.
operate.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start Push the switch a second time to select LO-level
heating. Push the switch a third time to shut the
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driv-
heating elements off.
er’s seat can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within ventilated seats control buttons are also located within the
two to five minutes. climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate. • Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose LO.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes • Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal the ventilated seat off.
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 to operate.
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number
of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
the change. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically On models that are equipped with remote start, the venti-
after approximately 45 minutes. lated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped start.
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the air If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature
from the passenger compartment and move air through can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to
fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. Panel” for further information.
The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO. If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located on the feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
center instrument panel below the climate controls. display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under-
Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped
WARNING!
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
cushion at the front edge of each seat. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious 3
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Dump Feature (Manual Recline Seat Only) —

Standard Cab
Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seatback to
swing (dump) forward on manual recliner seats. This
“dump” feature allows access to the storage bin behind the
seat.
Manual Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
actuating the handle. The seatback may swing for-
ward and hit you causing injury.
• To avoid injury, place your hand on the seatback and
actuate the handle, then position the seatback in the
desired position.
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped

The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard seat
portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat. On
some models, the back of the center portion (20%) easily Rear Seat Recliner Handle
folds down to provide an armrest/center storage compart-
WARNING!
ment.
Mega Cab Rear Seat Features Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped a collision, you could slide under the seat belt, which
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat could result in serious injury or death.
cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the handle,
lean back on the seatback and when you reach the desired
position, release the handle.
Folding Rear Seat (Table Mode) — If Equipped
Both the left and right rear seatbacks can be folded down
and used as a table.
To fold down either rear seatback: 3
1. Lift the handle, located next to the head restraint.
Table Mode
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
Table Mode Handle 3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright
2. Fold the seatback forward. position. Be sure the seatback is locked in place.
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped To fold either rear seat flat:
Both the outboard rear seats will drop and move forward 1. Lift the handle, located on the outboard side of either of
when the seatback is folded flat. the rear seats.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured cargo can fly
around in a sudden stop or collision and strike Folding Rear Seat Handle
someone in the vehicle, causing serious injury or 2. Fold the seatback down and push the seat forward.
death.
WARNING!
An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury
or death. Make sure that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback in not securely 3
locked into position the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
Rear Passenger Fold-Flat Seats head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright
position. Be sure the seat is locked in place. WARNING!
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush- • All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply restraints are placed in their proper positions in
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
cushion will return to its normal shape. of a crash.
(Continued)
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Front Head Restraints

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located on the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint. Adjustment Buttons
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it can go. 1 — Release Button
Then, push the adjustment button and the release button at 2 — Adjustment Button
the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into
WARNING!
the holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
re-installation instructions above prior to operating pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed 3
the vehicle or occupying a seat. head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and removable
head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint
and push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button
and the release button while pulling upward on the whole
assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the appropri-
ate height. Release/Adjustment Buttons
1 — Release Button
NOTE: To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat bottom 2 — Adjustment Button
must be folded up.
NOTE: NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one
• The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and Quad Cab) key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the other
has only one adjustment position that is used to aid in key fob can be linked to memory position 2.
the routing of a tether. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard side
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for of the driver’s seat cushion.
further information.
• Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clear-
ance to the back of the head.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED Memory Seat Buttons

This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
the driver’s seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (if
equipped) and a set of desired radio station presets. Your
remote keyless entry key fob can also be programmed to
recall the same positions when the unlock button is pushed.
Programming The Memory Feature Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
To create a new memory profile, perform the following: Key Fob To Memory
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position (do
pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock
not start the engine). 3
button on the key fob.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
NOTE: Before programming your key fobs to memory the
ences (seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals and radio
feature has to be selected.
station presets).
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, you must
3. Push and release the S (set) button on the memory select the “Memory To Fob” feature through the
switch. Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster dis- tion.
play will show which memory position has been set. • If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, you
NOTE: must select the “Key Fob Linked To Memory” feature
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instru-
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
ment Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instru-
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
ment Panel” for further information.
profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
Fob To Memory” in this section.
To program your key fobs, perform the following: Memory Position Recall
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position. NOTE:
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). • For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK,
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ for instructions on a message will appear in the instrument cluster display.
how to set a memory profile.
• For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall
S (set) button on the memory switch, then push and memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the
release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster appear in the instrument cluster display.
display.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
10 seconds.
memory switch, push memory button (1) on the
NOTE: Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory memory switch.
settings by pushing the S (set) button, and within 10
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
fob.
memory position 1.
Driver Two Memory Position Recall The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the you have the driver’s seat positioned when you remove the
memory switch, push memory button (2) on the key fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for
memory switch. vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
• When you remove the key fob from the ignition (or 3
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move about
memory position 2.
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat position
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
cancelled, the driver’s seat and the power pedals (if position when you place the ignition into the ACC or
equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur RUN position.
before another recall can be selected.
• When you remove the key fob from the ignition (or
Easy Entry/Exit Seat change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning to Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move to a
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the position 0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if
vehicle. the driver’s seat position is between 0.9 inches and 2.7
inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm) To open the hood, two latches must be released.
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or 1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering
Easy Entry. wheel at the base of the instrument panel.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
Hood Release
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push the safety latch lever to the left to release it,
before raising the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage. 3
LIGHTS
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight
switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and fog lights
(if equipped).
Safety Latch Location (1500 Series Shown)
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Headlight Switch Location

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog Headlights
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less suscep-
tible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens clean- switch clockwise to the headlight position. When
ing procedures must be followed. the headlight switch is on, the parking lights,
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and taillights, license plate light and instrument
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights,
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off) position.
by rinsing. Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated ap- This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
proach lights under the outside mirrors they can be turned according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
off through the instrument cluster display or the Uconnect rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
radio. For further information refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” and “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel”.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this
3
feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
Automatic Headlight Position Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is also
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except
seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
PARK. This provides a constant ⬙lights on⬙ condition until
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
half of normal intensity. If the parking brake is applied, the
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn
will turn on in the Automatic Mode. signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the
vehicle may turn off for the duration of the turn signal
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL
Automatic Headlights Only)
lamp will illuminate.
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if
Headlight Delay mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera de-
tects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
out of view.
approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated
when the ignition is turned off while the headlight switch NOTE:
is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight • If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition to the on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
ON/RUN position. Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this further information.
feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. • If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned
Instrument Panel” for further information. on or off using the instrument cluster display. Refer to
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster Instrument Panel” for further information.
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” for further • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
information. of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
Equipped and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat- • To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam Sensi-
tivity Control (not recommended), toggle the high beam
lever six full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at
ON. System will return to default setting upon ignition or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
off.
To Deactivate
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in 3
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to
vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
operation of low beams).
dealer.
To Activate 2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
system.
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
Automatic High Beams are enabled through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor- To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
mation. lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to
Automatic High Beams are enabled through the instru- the O (off) position.
ment cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight posi-
tion.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
Fog Lights — If Equipped Lights-On Reminder
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
switch to the parking light or headlight position and after the ignition is turned off, a chime will sound when the
pushing in the headlight rotary control. driver’s door is opened.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes, or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to
the “dome on” position for 10 minutes, the interior lights
will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF,
Fog Light Switch the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for
on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights
indicator light located in the instrument cluster display will automatically turn off.
will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights
will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time,
when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or
the high beam is selected.
Interior Lights NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the
dimming of the touchscreen is programmable through the
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Under-
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further details.
wheel on the bottom of the switch) is rotated to the far right
detent position. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote 3
Keyless Entry, and the unlock button is pushed on the key
fob, the courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a
door is open, and the interior lights are on, rotating the
dimmer control all the way left, to the off detent, will cause
all the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the
⬙Party⬙ mode because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s
battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel as well as the
ambient lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer
control right (brighter) or left (dimmer). When the head-
lights are on you can supplement the brightness of the
Dimmer Control
odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by
rotating the control to the right until you hear a click. This
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
headlights are required during the day.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger
compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a
door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (full right position), or when the
unlock button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry key
fob, if equipped. These lights are also operated individu-
ally as reading lights by pushing on the corresponding
lens.
Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light

NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned off, they will
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights

Ambient Light Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) are turned on
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility by pushing on the cargo lights button.
of the floor console area.
3
Cargo Lights Button

Ambient Light The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will also turn
on for approximately 60 seconds when a key fob unlock
button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
Multifunction Lever NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
steering column.
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defec-
Turn Signals tive.
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows Lane Change Assist
on each side of the instrument cluster display will flash to
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
lights.
times. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will automatically
turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn
on until the lever is released.
Turn Signal Lever

High/Low Beam Switch WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel Windshield Wipers
to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the multi-
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
function lever back toward the steering wheel will turn the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the handle to select the 3
low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
desired wiper speed.
High/Low Beam Switch

Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
tion.
Intermittent Wiper System while in the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle
approximately three times after the wash knob is released.
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For maxi- cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
mum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob into the exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
upper end of the delay range. information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it
enters the low continual speed position. The delay can be WARNING!
regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
(16 km/h) or less. shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
Windshield Washers with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the Mist Feature
second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wiper
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a
will operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is
passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob, located
released from this position.
on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the first
If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range, detent and release. The wipers will cycle one time and
the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer automatically shut off.
knob is released. It will then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer Positions 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wiper sensitivity. Positions 4 and 5 can be used if the driver
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the O
spray the windshield with washer fluid. (off) position when not using the system.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped NOTE: 3
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and auto- • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
matically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
especially useful for road splash or overspray from the • The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate shield.
this feature.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
Instrument Panel” for further information. wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the greater than 32°F (0°C).
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive.
Position 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the igni-
tion is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL
position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until
the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist. Tilt Steering Lever
TILT STEERING COLUMN WARNING!

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
or downward. The tilt lever is located on the steering Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
column, below the multifunction lever. ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the this warning may result in serious injury or death.
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in
place.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated remote start.
steering wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an 3
average of 80 minutes before automatically shutting off.
This time may vary based on the temperature of the
surrounding environment or the heated steering wheel
may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on the
center of the instrument panel below the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the heated standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
steering wheel control button is located within the climate
or controls screen of the touchscreen. WARNING!
• Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
the heating element on.
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
• Press the heated steering wheel button a second time spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
to turn the heating element off. tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
wheel to operate.
for long periods.
(Continued)
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the
steering column.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED

The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater
range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat
position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, and
clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away from
the driver to provide improved position with the steering
wheel.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Speed Control System is on. The
following messages will appear on vehicles equipped
with an instrument cluster display if the pedals are
attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out:
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged”
or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel. Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if 3
best possible seat/pedal position. movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjust-
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you able pedal’s path.
can use your remote keyless entry key fob or the
memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return
the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed positions. Re-
fer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
SPEED CONTROL NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). speed control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting
the steering wheel. the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The cruise control indicator
light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second
time. The cruise control indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
Speed Control Switches control and have an accident. Always leave the system
1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET - off when you are not using it.
2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL
To Set A Desired Speed The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): 3
selected speed.
U.S. Speed (mph)
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button. • Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
To Deactivate results in an increase of 1 mph.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle continue to increase until the button is released, then the
will deactivate Speed Control without erasing the set speed new set speed will be established.
memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the
ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory. Metric Speed (km/h)
To Resume Speed • Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h). • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
To Vary The Speed Setting new set speed will be established.
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
To Decrease Speed To Accelerate For Passing
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pushing the SET (-) button. pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the Using Speed Control On Hills
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
vehicle set speed.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
U.S. Speed (mph)
normal.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, it
results in a decrease of 1 mph. may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will WARNING!

continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established. Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
Metric Speed (km/h)
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
results in a decrease of 1 km/h. snow-covered or slippery.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 18 inches (45 cm) up to 79 inches (200
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
tion, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
obstacle. 3
parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system ParkSense Warning Display
and recommendations.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
changed to the ON/RUN position. detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
mation.
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or “Sound and Display” is selected.
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operat- NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this
ing speed, a warning will appear within the instrument feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system.
cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is Instrument Panel” for further information.
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h). If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
ParkSense Sensors
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” for further
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ information.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will
turn on indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single solid arc in the left and/or
right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to Single 1/2 Second Tone
continuous.
Slow Tone Fast Tone

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance Greater than 79-45 inches 45-31 inches 31-18 inches Less than
(inches/cm) 79 inches (200 (200-115 cm) (115-80 cm) (80-45 cm) 18 inches (45 cm)
cm)
Audible Alert None Single 1/2 Slow Fast Continuous
Chime Second Tone
Arc None 4th Solid 3rd 2nd 1st
Solid Flashing Flashing
Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instru-
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. ment cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The rear chime volume settings are programmable. NOTE: The ParkSense system will automatically disable
when the system detects that a trailer with trailer brakes 3
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the has been connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake Module.
settings may be programmed through the Uconnect The instrument cluster display will show the
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Understand- “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. reverse.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
settings may be programmed through the instrument disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be off
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in when the system is enabled.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system is
disabled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
switch.
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instru-
the system, the instrument cluster display will ment cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for ap- ignition cycle, and it will show the ⬙PARKSENSE UN-
proximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument AVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or the ⬙PARKSENSE
Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message. Refer to
Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the gear ParkSense System Usage Precautions
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
NOTE:
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
show the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN- • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
SORS⬙ or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE- dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
QUIRED⬙ message for as long as the vehicle is in RE- properly.
VERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate. • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ affect the performance of ParkSense.
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the • When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper display will show ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙. Furthermore,
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc- once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
tion, and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
to appear, see an authorized dealer.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
appears in the instrument cluster display, see your autho- cluster display will show the ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ mes-
rized dealer. sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Cleaning The ParkSense System • ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and when it is sounding a tone.
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
WARNING!
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
Failure to do so can result in the system not working using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check 3
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/ and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
bumper. sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
• Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 18 serious injury or death.
inches (45 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper while driv- • Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
ing the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem, disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
causing the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
REQUIRED⬙ message to appear in the instrument cluster injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
display. hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense should tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A lowered and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
is behind the vehicle.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
CAUTION!
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to changed to the ON/RUN position.
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the gear selector positions, the system will remain active until
sensors will not be detected when they are in close the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
proximity. (11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the instru-
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ment cluster display indicating the vehicle is above
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an ParkSense operating speed. The system will become active
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense.
ParkSense Sensors
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
IF EQUIPPED bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or from approximately 18 inches (45 cm) up to 79 inches (200
front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-
moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to tion, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
“ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in this section for obstacle.
limitations of this system and recommendations.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/ If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under-
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the 3
ParkSense Display
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle. The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
ParkSense Warning Display
is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or
obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
Instrument Panel” for further information. region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or
right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show
“Sound and Display” is selected.
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. continuous.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows
one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The follow-
ing chart shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance Greater than 79 79-45 inches 45-31 inches 31-18 inches Less than 18
(inches/cm) inches (200 cm) (200-115 cm) (115-80 cm) (80-45 cm) inches
(45 cm)
Front Distance Greater than 47 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than 12
(inches/cm) inches (120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert None Single 1/2 Slow (for rear Fast Continuous
(Chime) Second Tone (for only)
rear only)
Arcs None 4th Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Rear
ParkSense switch.
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob- When the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pushed to disable the system, the instrument
pedal is applied. cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE 3
OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are program- Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
mable.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the Front or Rear system is disabled, the instrument cluster
settings may be programmed through the Uconnect display will show the ⬙FRONT PARKSENSE OFF⬙ or
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Understand- ⬙REAR PARKSENSE OFF⬙ message for five seconds, fol-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. lowed by a vehicle graphic with ⬙OFF⬙ in the correspond-
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the ing side. This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long
settings may be programmed through the instrument as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in NOTE: Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system, will
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- interrupt the five second messages, and the instrument
formation. cluster display will show the vehicle graphic with the
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear corresponding arcs and ⬙OFF⬙ message.
ParkSense The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on when
Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
Front ParkSense switch. Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
Front or Rear system is enabled. If the Front or Rear
ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires messages if an object is detected within the five second
service, the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain dis-
momentarily, and then the LED will be on. played for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it
SORS⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. When the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an autho-
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has
rized dealer.
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display
will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT QUIRED⬙ message appears in the instrument cluster dis-
SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE- play, see an authorized dealer.
QUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds. After five Cleaning The ParkSense System
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with ⬙UN-
AVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
depending on where the fault is detected. The system will a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is function- or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
ing properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the sensors.
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙,
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
ParkSense System Usage Precautions • Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
NOTE:
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow, Failure to do so can result in the system not working
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an 3
operating properly. obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
affect the performance of ParkSense. behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, the instru- • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
ment cluster display will read “FRONT PARKSENSE off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
OFF” or “REAR PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once etc. are placed within 18 inches (45 cm) from the rear
you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, it remains off until fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key. misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE REQUIRED” message to be appear in the instrument
position and Front or Rear ParkSense is turned off, the cluster display.
instrument cluster display will show the ⬙FRONT
PARKSENSE OFF⬙ or ⬙REAR PARKSENSE OFF⬙ mes- • On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense should
sage for five seconds, followed by a vehicle graphic with be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open
⬙OFF⬙ in the corresponding side. This vehicle graphic position. A lowered tailgate could provide a false indi-
will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in cation that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon- sensors will not be detected when they are in close
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to proximity.
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
serious injury or death. ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is ParkSense.
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the EQUIPPED
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
Back Up Camera that allows you to see a image of the rear
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
put into REVERSE or whenever it is initiated through the
is behind the vehicle.
⬙Backup Camera⬙ button in the ⬙Controls⬙ menu. Whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE, the image will be
displayed in the rearview mirror display (if equipped) or
Uconnect screen (if equipped) along with a caution note to NOTE: If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h),
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously
After five seconds this note will disappear. until deactivated via the touchscreen button ⬙X⬙.
The ParkView Camera is located to the left of the tailgate If Equipped — Cargo Camera Icons:
3
handle. • — Backup Camera Touchscreen Button
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera • — Cargo Camera Touchscreen Button
delay turned off), the rear Camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again. If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button
to indicate the current active Camera image being
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera displayed is made available whenever the Rear View
delay turned on), the rear Camera image will be displayed Camera image is displayed.
for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless
the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button
transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is to switch the display to Cargo Camera image is made
switched to the OFF position. available whenever the Rear View Camera image is
displayed.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button in the ⬙Controls⬙ A touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display of the camera
menu, a display timer for the image is initiated. The image image is made available when the vehicle is not in RE-
will continue to be displayed until the display timer VERSE gear.
exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is above 8 mph When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
(13 km/h) or the touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
of the Rear View Camera image is pressed. backup path based on the steering wheel position. The
active guide lines will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE: For further information about how to access and
CAUTION!
change the programmable features of the ParkView Rear
Backup Camera, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under- • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
The following table shows the approximate distances for unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
each zone: path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
Zones Distance to the rear of slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
the vehicle time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
when using ParkView.
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
greater) up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
Turning Rear View Camera Image On: OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
1. Press the ⬙Controls⬙ button located on the bottom of the The overhead console is located on the headliner above the
Uconnect display. review mirror. The overhead console contains the follow-
ing features:
2. Press the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button to turn the Rear 3
View Camera system on. • Courtesy/Reading Lights
NOTE: Once initiated by the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button, the • Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped
Rear View Camera image may be deactivated by pressing • Power Sliding Rear Window Switch — If Equipped
the ⬙X⬙ button on the touchscreen. On deactivation, the
• Universal Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
previous selected screen will appear.
Overhead Console
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger
compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a
door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (full right position), or when the
unlock button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry key
fob, if equipped. These lights are also operated individu-
ally as reading lights by pushing on the corresponding
lens.
Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light

NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned off, they will
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead
console designate the three different HomeLink channels.
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door 3
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
HomeLink Buttons NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Alarm is active. federal safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
WARNING! garage door opener without these safety features. Call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
while you are training the universal transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people, pets or other Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before
you begin programming.
(Continued)
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of Programming A Rolling Code
the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device tured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identi-
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system. fied by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds. The instrument close the door. The name and color of the button may vary
cluster display will display “CLEARING CHANNELS.” by manufacturer.
Release the buttons when “CHANNELS CLEARED” ap-
pears on the display.
NOTE:
• For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place
the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the
engine ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or
that the garage door remains open at all times.
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please Training The Garage Door Opener
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at 1 — Door Opener
HomeLink.com for information or assistance. 2 — Training Button
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some 3
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
garage door remains open at all times.
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) LEARN/TRAIN mode.
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
program while you push and hold the hand - held
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
transmitter button.
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument seconds each time). The instrument cluster display will
cluster display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAIN- show “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If the garage door
ING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both opener/device activates, programming is complete.
buttons.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
NOTE: push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases the training.
for the channel to train. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
• If “DID NOT TRAIN” appears in the Instrument each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Cluster Display, repeat from Step 2.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling 4. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument
Code) cluster display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
buttons.
follow these steps:
NOTE:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the for the channel to train.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button. • If the instrument cluster display shows “DID NOT
TRAIN”, repeat from Step 2.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The
steps. instrument cluster display will display “CHANNEL #
TRANSMIT.” If the garage door opener/device acti-
Programming A Non-Rolling Code vates, programming is complete.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
before 1995. each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. channels.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program. (Non-Rolling Code)
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
program while you push and hold the hand - held follow these steps:
transmitter button. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the NOTE: For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
release the button. For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the
ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. Make
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
sure while programming HomeLink with the engine ON 3
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remain-
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
ing steps.
garage door remains open at all times.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States away from the HomeLink button you wish to program.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button while you push
several seconds of transmission.
and release (“cycle”), your hand - held transmitter every
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals two seconds.
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up 4. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian cluster display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in ING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both
the same manner. buttons.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling NOTE:

process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door • It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
or gate motor. for the channel to train.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. • If the instrument cluster display shows “DID NOT
TRAIN”, repeat from Step 2.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/
instrument cluster display will display “CHANNEL # Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and follow all
TRANSMIT.” If the device is plugged in and activates, remaining steps.
programming is complete.
Using HomeLink
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
programming, plug it back in at this time.
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
(Canadian/Gate Operator) system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
follow these steps: any time.
Security
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
NOTE: For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
your vehicle.
place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the To erase the channels press and hold the two outside
ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. Make HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The
sure while programming HomeLink with the engine ON instrument cluster display will display “CLEARING
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the instrument
garage door remains open at all times. cluster display shows “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
instrument cluster display shows “CHANNEL # Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
TRAINING” Do not release the button.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
are some of the most common solutions: Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand- that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by 3
held transmitter. Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
• Did you unplug the device for programming and re- at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
member to plug it back in? tance.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at General Information
HomeLink.com for information or assistance. The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
WARNING! This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger- with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close 2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
while you are programming the universal trans- cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets tion.
(Continued)
WARNING!
user’s authority to operate the equipment. • Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
console between the courtesy/reading lights. equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
Power Sunroof Switch
jury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode Closing Sunroof — Express
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward. Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
The sunroof will move rearward and automatically stop at second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
full open position. Any release of the switch will stop the position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close 3
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
pushed again. sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode Pinch Protect Feature
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward. This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
The sunroof will move forward and automatically stop at sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
full closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again. curs.
Opening Sunroof — Express NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable, and the
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati- Venting Sunroof — Express
cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
stop the sunroof.
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation Ignition Off Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the The power sunroof switch will remain active in Accessory
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. Delay for up to approximately ten minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the lock position. Opening
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
either front door will cancel this feature.
open.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Wind Buffeting
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. ment Panel” for further information.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the
windows open, open the front and rear windows together standard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the and USB Port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the outlet indicating “12V DC,” together with either a key
buffeting or open any window. symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.
Sunroof Maintenance A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide
glass panel. power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is
connected to the battery, and can provide power at all
times.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a Mopar knob and The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following
element must be used. locations:
• Lower left and lower right of the center stack when
CAUTION! equipped with a bench seat.
3
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Im-
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Power Outlets — Center Stack

1 — Power Outlet
2 — USB Port (Charge Only)
• Center console when equipped with bucket seats. • Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment
— if equipped.
Power Outlet — Center Console

USB Port (Charge Only) — Upper Lid
• Rear of the center console storage compartment — Quad
Cab or Crew Cab.
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console Fuse
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console Bin / USB
Port (Charge Only) from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear Center Console cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug any engine from starting.
equipment as to not drain the battery of the vehicle. All • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be removed or vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
battery against discharge. tently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
CAUTION! (Continued)
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long inverter should automatically reset.
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a 3
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF

EQUIPPED
A removable cigar lighter and ash receiver are available.
For vehicles with a bench seat, the cup holder tray can be
used to hold the ash receiver.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED

A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the Power Inverter Outlet
center stack of the instrument panel, to the right of the To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device. The
radio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics outlet automatically turns off when the device is un-
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 plugged.
Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools. NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when switch
WARNING!
type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
To avoid serious injury or death:
For further information on using the auxiliary switches,
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. please refer to the Ram Body Builders Guide by accessing
• Do not touch with wet hands. www.rambodybuilder.com and choosing the appropriate
• Close the lid when not in use. links.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure. CUPHOLDERS
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED Front Seat Cupholders (40–20–40 Seats)
There can be up to five auxiliary switches located in the The cupholders are located on the backside of the center
lower switch bank of the instrument panel which can be portion of the front seat (20). Fold down the center section
used to power various electronic devices and PTO (Power of the front seat to gain access to the cupholders.
Take Off) – If Equipped. If Power Take Off is equipped, it
will take the place of the fifth Auxiliary switch. Connec-
tions to the switches are found under the hood in the
connectors attached to the auxiliary Power Distribution
Center.
You have the ability to configure the functionality of the
auxiliary switches via the instrument cluster display. All
switches can now be configured for setting the switch type
operation to latching or momentary, power source of either
battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state across key
cycles.
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor Rear Cupholders — If Equipped
Storage Bin Some vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders located
For vehicles equipped with bucket seats, two cupholders in the center armrest.
are located next to the center console storage bin.
3
Rear Armrest Cupholder

Front Cupholders For Bucket Seats
Some vehicles may be equipped with a rear cupholder that STORAGE
consists of two cup wells for rear passenger convenience.
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower
storage area.
Rear Cup Wells
Glove Compartment
1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
To open the upper glove compartment, push upward on To open the lower glove compartment, pull the release
the handle release. The glove compartment door will handle.
automatically open.
Lower Glove Compartment

Upper Glove Compartment
Door Storage Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Front Door Storage — If Equipped Storage compartments are located in both the driver and
passenger rear door trim panels.
Storage areas and bottle holders (driver’s side only) are
located in the door trim panels.
Rear Door Storage
Front Door Storage

Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped
WARNING!
The center storage compartment is located between the
driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment • This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
provides an armrest and contains both and upper and armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
lower storage area. operation, or a collision. Only use the center seating 3
position when the armrest is fully upright.
• In a collision, the latch may open if the total weight
of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
These items could be thrown about endangering
occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should not
exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
Center Storage Compartment

Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to raise
the cover. The upper storage area contains a USB power
outlet that can be used to power small electrical devices,
refer to “Electrical Power Outlets” for further information.
Lower Storage Bin
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
Upper Storage Compartment compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to open sion.
the lower storage bin.
The center console is equipped with a front storage bin Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If Equipped
located next to the cupholders. This storage bin may be In-floor storage bins are located in front of the second row
equipped with a manual sliding top door. seats and can be used for extra storage. The storage bins
have removable liners that can be easily removed for
cleaning. 3
Front Storage Bin With Door — If Equipped
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch

To open in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the handle of Seatback Storage
the latch and open the lid. Located in the back of both the driver and passenger front
NOTE: The front seat may have to be moved forward to seats are pockets that can be used for storage.
fully open the lid.
Driver’s Side Seatback Storage
Opened Storage Bin

Storage (Regular Cab) Storage and Seats (Crew Cab/Quad Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs The Crew Cab and Quad Cab models provide additional
the length of the cab. storage under the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the
storage compartment.
3
To open the storage compartments, unsnap the securing
snap located at either side of the load floor and lift upward
on the fold flat lid.
Storage Bin
Crew Cab Storage

NOTE: For more information on storage and the fold flat
floor, refer to “Fold Flat Load Floor” in this section.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
Models) defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, push
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles
the button a second time.
are built into the back panel of the cab, behind the rear seat.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Grocery Bag Hooks
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
REAR WINDOW FEATURES window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
Rear Window Defroster dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Push this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED
The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on Quad Cab and Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat
the overhead console. may be equipped with a folding load floor.
WARNING! 3
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on

the load floor. While driving or in an accident you may
experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration, or
sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor may
move around with force and strike occupants, resulting
in serious or fatal injury.
Rear Window Switch

Push the switch to the right to open the glass. Pull the
switch to the left to close the glass.
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the lock
to release the window.
Unfolding The Load Floor/Quad Cab
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
Load Floor In Open Position

3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Unfolding The Load Floor
2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until
the load floor unfolds into position.
Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab
Load Floor Legs In Opened Position

3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds into
position.
Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position
2. Unfold both the legs using the straps.
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.
When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor
could move to the down position causing serious
injury.
Quad Cab — If Equipped
Load Floor In Open Position

4. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access Under
The Seat
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the
load floor. Load Floor Securing Straps/Quad Cab
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load
floor.
Crew Cab — If Equipped
Pick Up Box Features

Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab 1 — Upper Load Floor Indents
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the 2 — Bulk Head Dividers
secured down position before you operate the vehicle. 3 — Cleats
PICKUP BOX NOTE: If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or

The pickup box has many features designed for utility and Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you must
convenience. use Mopar Box Reinforcement Brackets that are available
from your authorized dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of plywood,
etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber across the
box in the indentations provided above the wheel housings
and in the bulkhead dividers to form the floor.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of
WARNING!
the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs
• The pickup box is intended for load carrying pur- (450 kg) total.
poses only, not for passengers, who should sit in Cargo Camera — If Equipped
seats and use seat belts.
• Care should always be exercised when operating a Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cargo Camera that
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds may allows you to see an image of the inside of the pickup box.
need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may The image will be displayed in the Uconnect screen.
cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may The Cargo Camera is located in the bottom center area of
result in vehicle damage. If wide building materials the center high-mounted stoplamp (CHMSL).
are to be frequently carried, the installation of a A touchscreen button to indicate the current active
support is recommended. This will restrain the cargo camera image being displayed is made available when-
and transfer the load to the pickup box floor. ever the Cargo Camera image is displayed.
• If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse, supports Also, a touchscreen button to switch the display to
must be installed to transfer the weight of the load to rear view camera image is made available whenever the
the pickup box floor or vehicle damage may result. Cargo Camera image is displayed.
The use of proper supports will permit loading up to A touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display of the camera
the rated payload. image is made available when the vehicle is not in RE-
• Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an VERSE gear.
accident causing serious or fatal injury.
A display timer is initiated when the Cargo Camera image
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side is displayed. The image will continue to be displayed until
bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel the display timer exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle speed
housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side to is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to
side to create separate load compartments in the pickup box. disable display of the Cargo Camera image is pressed.
NOTE: RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
• If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box storage
Cargo Camera image will be displayed continuously and cargo management system consisting of three features:
until the touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display of the • Integrated box side storage bins
Cargo Camera image is pressed. 3
• Cargo extender/divider
• If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry • Bed rail tie-down system
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins
Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off — With Uconnect Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup
8.4/8.4 NAV box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable,
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the illuminated storage for up to 150 lbs (68 kg) for 1500 series
Uconnect display. vehicles or 300 lbs (136 kg) for 2500 and 3500 series vehicles
of evenly distributed cargo.
2. Press the “Cargo Camera” button to turn the Cargo
Camera system on.
NOTE: Once initiated by the ⬙Cargo Camera⬙ button, the
Cargo Camera image may be deactivated by pressing the
⬙X⬙ soft button. On deactivation, the previous selected
screen will appear.
To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked, push and
release the button located on the lid. The RamBox lid will
open upward to allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully open.
NOTE: RamBox will not open when the pushbutton is
pushed if the RamBox is locked.
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause
damage to the vehicle:
• Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is
properly secured. RamBox Pushbutton And Lock
• Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb (68 kg) The interior of the RamBox will automatically illuminate
1500 series vehicles or 300 lbs (136 kg) for 2500 and when the lid is opened. In addition to the automatic
3500 series vehicles per bin. illumination switch, there is a manual on/off switch lo-
cated at the rear of each storage bin. Pushing the switch
once will turn off the bin lights, pushing the switch again
will turn the lights back on.
NOTE: Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers and shelf supports. These accessories (in addition
to other RamBox accessories) are available from Mopar.
Locking And Unlocking RamBox
3
Push and release the lock or unlock button on the key fob
to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox
(if equipped). Refer to “Remote Keyless Entry” for further
details. The RamBox storage bins can be locked using the
vehicle key. To lock and unlock the storage bin, insert the
key into the keyhole on the push button and turn clockwise
to lock or counterclockwise to unlock. Always return the
RamBox Light Switch key to the upright (vertical) position before removing the
key from the push button.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time
could cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If the lid • Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before
is required to stay open for extended periods of time, it moving or driving vehicle.
is recommended that the bin lights be turned off • Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be
manually using the on/off switch. minimized to prevent damage to the lid and latching/
hinging mechanisms.
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow
water to drain from bins). To remove plug, pull up on the (Continued)
edge. To install push plug downward into drain hole.
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to heavy/ • Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while
sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to vehicle the vehicle is in motion.
motion. In order to minimize potential for damage, • Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
secure all cargo to prevent movement and protect
inside surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects with RamBox Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
appropriate padding. — If Equipped
As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover Emergency
RamBox Safety Warning Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mecha-
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal nism.
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the storage
bins. Once in the storage bin, young children may
not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
• In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open. Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
(Continued)
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside To install the bed extender into the storage position,
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from perform the following:
inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
Bed Extender — If Equipped release the extender side gates. 3
The bed extender has three functional positions:

• Storage Position
• Divider Position
• Extender Position
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of
the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when
not in use.
Center Handle And Lock

1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
2. With the side gates open, position the extender fully 3. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard ends
forward in the bed against the front panel. to be positioned in front of the cargo tie down loops.
Storage Position Cargo Tie Down Loop

4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side To install the bed extender into a divider position, perform
gates in the closed position. the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the extender side gates. 3
Side Gates Closed

5. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure
the panel into place.
Divider Position Center Handle And Lock
The divider position is intended for managing your cargo 1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the
bed. There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels
which allow for various positions to assist in managing
your cargo.
2. With the side gates open, position the extender so the 3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends
outboard ends align with the intended slots in the sides are secured into the intended slots of the bed.
of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side
gates in the closed position.
Aligning Gate To Slots

Side Gates Closed
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place.
Extender Position To install the bed extender into the extender position,
perform the following:
The extender position allows you to load the bed of the
truck beyond the tail gate. The bed extender will add an 1. Lower the tailgate.
additional 15 inches (38 cm) in the back of the truck when
additional cargo room is needed. The extender position 2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the 3
center handle vertically in order to release the extender
utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on both
sides of the truck bed near the tailgate. side gates.
3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and handle.
Extender Position
Extender Installation
4. Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure
into place.
• When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg) load on the tailgate.
• The bed extender is not intended for off road use.
• When not in use, the extender/divider should be in
stowed or divider position with the tailgate closed.
• When in use all handles are to be in the locked
position.
Bed Rail Tie-Down System
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 250 lbs
Locking Tab (113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat should
not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or damage to
WARNING! the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
To reduce the risk of potential injury or property

damage:
• Cargo must be secured.
• Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle.
• Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie downs.
• Extender should not be used as cargo tie down.
(Continued)
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed that To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut
can be used to assist in securing cargo. counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull out
on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the desired
location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and
tighten the nut. 3
Adjustable Cleats
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of
the detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargo
properly secure. Adjustable Cleat Assembly
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
cap screw located in the center of the end cap, using a #T30
Camper Applications
Torx head driver. Remove the end cap and slide the cleat
off the end of the rail. Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the “Consumer Information Truck-Camper Load-
ing” document available from your authorized dealer. For
safety reasons, follow all instructions in this important
document.
NOTE: When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate Center High-Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL) must be provided.
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed.
Utility Rail End Cap
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera or
Remote Keyless Entry, the electrical connector must be
disconnected prior to removing the tailgate.
Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or Remote 2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by pushing
Keyless Entry — If Equipped inward in the locking tab.
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera or Remote
Keyless Entry connector bracket located on the rear sill.
3
Locking Tab
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness, ensuring the
connector bracket does not fall into the sill.
Connector Bracket 4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket (provided in the
glove compartment) to the chassis wiring harness and
insert the bracket back into the sill.
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the glove com-
partment) to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that
the terminals do not corrode.
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the
forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This will prevent
damaging the connector and bracket when storing or
reinstalling the tailgate.
Removing The Tailgate
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera and
or power locks (if equipped), refer to “Disconnecting the
Rear Camera — If Equipped” in this section.
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by
releasing the lock tang from the pivot.
NOTE: Make sure tailgate is supported when removing Locking Tang
support cables. 3. Position the tailgate on a 45 degree angle.
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side
pivot clears the hanger bracket.
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side
pivot.
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE: Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup
box.
NOTE: The Tonneau Cover can be folded up and secured
WARNING!
at the front of the box without removing completely.
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the over- To remove the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps: 3
hanging camper compartment and be free of leaks. 1. Lower the tailgate to gain access to the first set of two
Tonneau Cover clamps located on the driver and pas-
Locking Tailgate
senger underside of the Tonneau Cover.
The lock is located next to the tailgate handle. The tailgate
can be locked using the vehicle key or by locking the truck
with the key fob if equipped with remote keyless entry.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tri-Fold Tonneau
Cover which consists of different features:
• Easy Tri-Fold cover
• Tonneau fore aft locator
• Crosscar inside bed locator
• Front and rear clamps
Clamped Position
• Stowage strap
NOTE: If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.
• Locking Capability
2. Pull down on the first set of clamps on both driver and
passenger sides to the semi clamped position.
Proper Released Position

NOTE: Be sure the clamp and clamp wire is in the proper
Semi Clamped Position released position.
3. Pull down on the clamp wire and push the clamp up
into the proper released position.
4. Pick up on the tonneau cover and fold it back onto the
second panel.
5. Pick up on the cover and fold it back onto the third
panel.
3
6. Once in the third panel position, pull down on the
second set of clamps on both driver and passenger sides
to the semi clamped position.
Improper Clamp Wire Released Position
CAUTION!
Make sure the tonneau cover clamp and clamp wire is
in the proper released position. If the clamp and clamp
wire is not properly released, damage to the tonneau
cover material will result.
Semi Clamped Position

7. Pull down on the clamp wire and push the clamp up
into the proper released position.
Stowage Strap
9. With two people, remove the cover.
Proper Released Position
NOTE: Be sure the tonneau cover has been folded com-
8. Be sure to clip both stowage straps together to insure the pletely before removing.
cover stays together.
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation 3. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box (or
flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi clamped
To install the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps:
position.
1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the truck bed and
push the cover forward against the front of the truck 3
bed. The Tonneau Cover centers itself when placed on
the vehicle.
2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles to release the
clamps from the stowed position.
Stowed Position
4. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position to
properly engage the clamps.
Improper Clamp Position
Clamped Position
NOTE: Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially
clamped to the truck bed flange.
5. Disengage the stowage straps. 7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.
6. Unfold Tonneau Cover to the intermediate position.
NOTE: The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau
Cover is in this position. 3
Fully Unfolded Position
Intermediate Position (Vehicle Cannot Be Driven)

8. Pull down on the second set of clamp handles to release 9. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box (or
the clamps from the stowed position. flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi clamped
position.
Stowed Position
10. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position to
properly engage the clamps.
Improper Clamp Position
Clamped Position
NOTE: Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially
clamped to the truck bed flange.
The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in the Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning
clamped position by placing a lock through the locking For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use Mopar
hole. Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and Mopar Leather & Vinyl
Conditioner/Protectant.
Locking Hole
CAUTION!
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the Tonneau
Cover is properly installed on the vehicle. Failure to
follow this procedure can result in detachment of the
Tonneau Cover from the vehicle and/or damage to the
vehicle/Tonneau Cover.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . .231 ▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . . . . .275
4
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 ▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions —
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . .236
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
䡵 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . .263 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Controls . . . . . . . . .264 ▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
8.4/8.4 NAV Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Screens . . . . . . . . . .266
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Oil Life Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED. . . .319
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 ▫ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ CD Player — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 ▫ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .321 ▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . . .322 ▫ Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .322 ▫ Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 ▫ Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Manual Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen — ▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ Register (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Climate Controls With a Touchscreen . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
▫ Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV). . . . . . . . . .357
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Headlight Switch 7 — 115v Power Inverter Outlet 13 — Gear Selector/Transfer Case Position
Switch — If Equipped
2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Power Outlet — If Equipped 14 — Ignition Switch
3 — Radio 9 — Lower Switch Bank 15 — Hood Release
4 — Hazard Switch 10 — Instrument Panel Drawer 16 — Parking Brake Release
5 — Upper Glove Compartment 11 — Climate Controls
6 — Lower Glove Compartment 12 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter — If
Equipped
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Clusters

1. Tachometer 2. Instrument Cluster Display
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute • When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
(RPM x 1000). shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
3. Speedometer
WARNING!
• Indicates vehicle speed.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
4. Fuel Gauge others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
• The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Ve- 4
vehicle where the fuel door is located. hicle.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi- CAUTION!
cates that the engine cooling system is operating Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
satisfactorily. age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem- pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
operating range. authorized dealer for service.
Premium Instrument Clusters

1. Tachometer 2. Voltmeter
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute • When the engine is running, the gauge indicates the
(RPM x 1000). electrical system voltage. The pointer should stay
within the normal range if the battery is charged. If the
pointer moves to either extreme left or right and
remains there during normal driving, the electrical
system should be serviced.
NOTE: The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at 6. Instrument Cluster Display
various engine temperatures. This cycling operation is • When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold heater shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
system. The number of cycles and the length of the cycling to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
operation is controlled by the engine control module. Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Post-heat operation can run for several minutes, and then
the electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize. 7. Temperature Gauge 4
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
3. Oil Pressure Gauge cates that the engine cooling system is operating
• The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure satisfactorily.
when the engine is running. A continuous high or low • The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
reading under normal driving conditions may indicate perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
a lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
should be obtained from an authorized dealer. allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
4. Speedometer operating range.
• Indicates vehicle speed.
5. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
• The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
WARNING!
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Ve- in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
hicle.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
Pressure Cap paragraph. chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
CAUTION!
system check menu may appear different based upon
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam- equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” tales are optional and may not appear.
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light 4
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driv-
ing, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illumi-
nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale What It Means

Light
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake appli-
cation. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunc-
tion or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will
run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on fluid level checked.
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
WARNING!
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate,
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.
(EBD). NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
CAUTION!
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immedi-
ate repair to the ABS system is required.
Brake Warning Light

Light
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake appli-
cation. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunc-
tion or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will
run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on fluid level checked.
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
WARNING!
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer. 4
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
repair to the ABS system is required. applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
What It Means
Light
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a
set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4 minutes, or until
the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Battery Charge Warning Light

Light
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related compo-
nent.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle 4
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a prob-
lem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
Refer to “Electric Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Red Warning
What It Means
Light
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This telltale is on when the Trailer Brake has been disconnected.
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is open and not fully closed. 4
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
NOTE: Door Open Warning Light will differ depending on

the equipped instrument cluster display.
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to im-
mediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING! CAUTION!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. Immediate service is required.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If 4
the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-
hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, 4
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indica-
tions corresponding to each tire in sequence.
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
CAUTION!
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as those tires.)
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
possible.
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
CAUTION!
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
tire pressure telltale. have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
damage may result when using replacement equip-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
recommended that you take your vehicle to your au-
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on 4
until fuel is added.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate
function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and stays on at
road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative.
The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer im-
mediately. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle.
Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.
WARNING! CAUTION!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans- Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
Low Coolant Level Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Low Coolant Level Indicator Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level is low. 4
Air Suspension Payload Protection Telltale — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Air Suspension Payload Protection Telltale
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the maximum payload may have been exceeded or load
leveling cannot be achieved at its current ride height. Protection Mode will automatically be se-
lected in order to “protect” the air suspension system, air suspension adjustment is limited due to
payload.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected.
Cargo Light — If Equipped
Yellow Tell-
What It Means
tale Light
Cargo Light
The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo light is activated by pushing the cargo light button on
the headlight switch.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disen-
gage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is set to the Off-Road 1 setting. For fur-
ther information, refer to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting And Operating”. 4
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is set to the Off-Road 2 setting. For fur-
ther information, refer to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting And Operating”.
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator Light— If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator Light
This light will blink and alert the driver that the vehicle is changing to a higher ride height.
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light— If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light
This light will blink and alert the driver that the vehicle is changing to a lower ride height.
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light— If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Air Suspension Ride Height: Entry/Exit
This light comes on when the vehicle is automatically lowered from ride height position down-
ward for easy entry and exit of the vehicle. 4
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
4WD Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed.
4 Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
4 Low Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
Service 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Service 4WD Indicator Light
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and
have the vehicle serviced immediately.
2WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
2WD Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the two-wheel drive mode. 4
Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal
as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-
function lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped — Premium
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the speed control has been set.
4
4WD AUTO Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
4WD AUTO Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto mode, and the front
axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be auto-
matically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction.
For further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel
Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
What It Means
Light
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is on, but not set.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped — Base
White Telltale
What It Means
Light
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is set. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
What It Means
Light
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when Hill Descent Control (HDC) has been selected using the Hill
Descent Control Switch. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for fur- 4
ther information.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
What It Means
Light
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY the total miles (kilometers) in the odometer. Your instru-
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster ment cluster display is designed to display important
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the instru-
the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of
ment panel, your instrument cluster display can show you
a door will activate the display for viewing, and display
how systems are working and give you warnings when
they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display

The instrument cluster display menu items may consist of
the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Fuel Economy Info
Base Instrument Cluster Display • Trip A

• Trip B
• Air Suspension (If Equipped)
• Audio
• Trailer Tow • Up Arrow Button
• Stored Messages Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
• Screen Setup upward through the main menu items, submenu
screen, and vehicle settings.
• Vehicle Settings (Not Equipped with a Uconnect 5.0 &
8.4 radio) • Down Arrow Button
4
The system allows the driver to select information by Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
pushing the following instrument cluster display control downward through the main menu items, sub-
buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel: menu screen, and vehicle settings.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access/select the information screens or sub-
menu screens of a main menu item. Push and
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to
reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
• Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access/
select the information screens, submenu screens
of a main menu item, or to return to the main
menu.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Instrument Cluster Display Screens 2. Temperature Display
Displays the outside temperature in degrees Celsius or
degrees Fahrenheit.
3. Main Screen
Displays main menu, submenus, settings.
4. White Telltales
5. Amber Telltales
6. Red Telltales
7. Audio/Phone Information And Submenu Information
Base Instrument Cluster Display

The instrument cluster display screens are located in the
center portion of the cluster and consists of seven sections:
1. Compass Display
Displays the current direction. Refer to “Compass Settings”
under “Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0/8.4 Settings” for further information.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display

The instrument cluster display screens are located in the 10. Selectable Gauge 1 (Trans Temp, Oil Temp, Oil Life,
center portion of the cluster and consists of eight sections: Trailer Brake, Current fuel economy)
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will The instrument cluster display area will normally display
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and main menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
white for on demand information. messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn- 4
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
2. Audio / Phone Information and Submenu Information into several categories:
— Whenever there are submenus available, the position
within the submenus is shown here. • Five Second Stored Messages
3. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of mes-
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Trailer sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds
Trip (distance only), Trailer Brake Gain, Time) and then returns to the previous screen. Most of the
messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
4. Telltales/Indicators condition that activated it remains active) and can be
5. Gear Selector Status reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long as
there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in the
6. Selectable Menu Icons instrument cluster display’s compass/outside temp line.
7. Air Suspension Status – If Equipped Examples of this message type are “Right Front Turn Signal
Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
8. 4WD Status
9. Selectable Gauge 2 (Trans Temp, Oil Temp, Oil Life,
Trailer Brake, Current Fuel Economy)
• Unstored Messages duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
driving style.
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal NOTE: Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle). controls for the following procedure(s).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition is START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
Pedal and Push Button to Start.”
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
• Five Second Unstored Messages
3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of mes- ”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll up or down to select
sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds “Oil Life.”
and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to select “Reset”.
message type is “Automatic High Beams On.”
5. Push and release the down arrow button to select “Yes,”
Oil Life Reset
then push and release the right arrow button to select
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi- reset of the Oil Life to 100%.
cator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display after a single 6. Push and release the up arrow button to exit the
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil instrument cluster display screen.
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry Speedometer
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). speedometer menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll cycle the display between mph and km/h.
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
Vehicle Info 4
3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the
“Vehicle Info” screen then scroll up or down to select Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
“Oil Life.” Vehicle Info menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. push and release the right arrow button to
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to select “YES” by enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info. follow the
pushing the right arrow then push and release the right directional prompts to access or reset any of the following
arrow button to select reset of the Oil Life to 100%. Vehicle Info submenu items:
5. Push and release the up arrow button to exit the • Tire Pressure
instrument cluster display screen.
• Air Suspension — If Equipped
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start
• Coolant Temp — If Equipped
the vehicle, the Oil Life indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure. • Transmission Temp (Automatic only)
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu Items • Oil Temp
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the • Oil Pressure — If Equipped
desired selectable menu icon is highlighted in the instru- • Oil Life
ment cluster display.
• Battery Voltage — If Equipped
• Gauge Summary — If Equipped Air Suspension — If Equipped
• Engine Hours Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Air
Suspension menu item is highlighted in the instrument
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the display the Air Suspension status.
Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted in the instrument
Trailer Tow
cluster display. Push and Hold the right arrow button to
reset Average Fuel Economy. Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
• Current Fuel Economy Gauge Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button
• Average Fuel Economy Value and the next screen will display the following trailer trip
• Range To Empty information:
Trip A/Trip B • Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold the right
arrow button to reset the distance.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster • Trailer Brake
display. Push and release the right arrow button to enter • Output
the submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B • Type
information will display the following: • Gain
• Distance Audio
• Average fuel economy Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
• Elapsed Time Audio display icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right arrow button to display
Push and hold right arrow button to reset all information. the active source.
Stored Messages Vehicle Settings Menu Item
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features
Push and release the up or down arrow button when the transmission is in PARK.
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted.
Push and release the up and down button until Settings
This feature shows the number of stored warning
displays in the instrument cluster display.
messages. Pushing the right arrow button will 4
allow you to see what the stored messages are. Follow the prompts to display and set any of the following
Vehicle Settings.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a
closed envelope. NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
settings.
Screen Setup Menu Item
• If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touchscreen) Vehicle
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Settings will be included in the instrument cluster dis-
Screen Setup menu item is highlighted in the instrument
play.
enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature • If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the Vehicle Set-
allows you to change what information is displayed in the tings will be included in the radio head unit.
instrument cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
Setting Names Abbreviated

Setting Names Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
(Left Submenu Layer)
1 Language Select Language English, Spanish, French, Italian, German, Dutch,
Portuguese, Arabic (If Equipped)
2 Units Units U.S.; Metric
3 ParkSense ParkSense • Notification — Sound Only; Sound & Display
• Front Volume — Low; Medium; High
• Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High
4 Tilt Mirror in Reverse Tilt Mirror in R On; Off
5 Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers On; Off
6 Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist On; Off
7 Headlights Off Delay Lights Off Delay 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
8 Illuminated Approach Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
9 Headlights On with Lights w/ Wipers On; Off
Wipers
10 Automatic Highbeams Auto Highbeams On; Off
11 Flash Lights with Lock Lights w/ Lock On; Off
12 Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On; Off
13 Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On; Off
14 Sound Horn with Horn w/ Rmt Start On; Off
Remote Start

15 Sound Horn with Horn w/ Rmt Lock Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press
Remote Lock
16 Remote Unlock Sequence Remote Unlock Driver Door; All Doors
17 Key Fob Linked to Key in Memory On; Off 4
Memory
18 Passive Entry Passive Entry On; Off
19 Remote Start Comfort Rmt Start Comfort Off; Remote Start; All starts
System
20 Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On; Off
21 Key-off Power Delay Power Off Delay Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes
22 Commercial Settings Commercial • Aux Switches
• Power Take-Off
• PIN Setup
23 Air Suspension Display Air Susp. Alerts All; Warnings Only
Alerts
24 Aero Ride Height Mode Aero Mode On; Off
25 Tire/Jack Mode Tire/Jack Mode On; Off
26 Transport Mode Transport Mode On; Off
27 Wheel Alignment Mode Wheel Alignment On; Off
28 Horn w/ Remote Lower Horn w/ Rmt Lwr On; Off

29 Lights w/ Remote Lights w/ Rmt Lwr On; Off
Lower
30 Trailer Select Trailer Select Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4
31 Brake Type Brake Type Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy
EOH
32 Trailer Name Trailer Name • Trailer # (# is equal to slot position)
• Boat
• Car
• Cargo
• Dump
• Equipment
• Flatbed
• Gooseneck
• Horse
• Livestock
• Motorcycle
• Snowmobile
• Travel
• Utility
• 5th Wheel
33 Compass Variance Compass Var 1-15 increments of 1

34 Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Cancel; Calibrate
35 Fuel Saver Display Fuel Saver On; Off
36 Park Assist Front Chime Park Assist Front Chime On; Off
Volume Volume 4
37 Park Assist Rear Chime Park Assist Rear Chime Vol- On; Off
Volume ume
Turn Menu OFF — If Equipped • Washer Fluid Low
Push and release the right arrow button to exit the main • Oil Pressure Low
menu. • Oil Change Due
Push and release any instrument cluster display control • Fuel Low
button to enter the instrument cluster display main menu
again. • Service Antilock Brake System
Instrument Cluster Display Messages • Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled • Service Power Steering
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled • Cruise Off

• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled • Cruise Ready
• Service Airbag System • Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Traction Control Off • Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(S) “Inflate Tire To
XX”
• Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) • Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Service Tire Pressure System • Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Parking Brake Engaged • Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Brake Fluid Low • Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Service Electronic Braking System • Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
• Engine Temperature Hot • Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Battery Voltage Low • Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
• Service Electronic Throttle Control • Service Airbag System
• Lights On • Service Airbag Warning Light
• Right Turn Signal Light Out • Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Left Turn Signal Light Out • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Turn Signal On • Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Sound Horn With Remote Lock: Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press • Door Open
• Vehicle Not In Park • Doors Open
• Key In Ignition • Gear Not Available
• Key In Ignition Lights On • Shift Not Allowed
• Remote Start Active Key To Run • Shift To Neutral Then Drive Or Reverse
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button • Autostick Unavailable Service Required
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req. • Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
• Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake • Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift To Park Wait To Cool • Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
• Transmission Cool Ready To Drive • Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
• Trailer Brake Disconnected • Service Air Suspension System Immediately 4
• Service Transmission • Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height
• Service Shifter • Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait
• Engage Park Brake To Prevent Rolling • Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
• Transmission Too Cold Idle With Engine On • Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance
• Washer Fluid Low • Entry/Exit Watch For Clearance
• Service Air Suspension System • Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And
Tire Change
• Heavy Duty Air Suspension System Disabled
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Speed
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Payload
white telltales area on the right, yellow telltales in the
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted - Payload Too Light middle, and red telltales on the left.
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
• Normal Ride Height Achieved
• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — NOTE:
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped • The charging system is independent from load reduc-
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical charging system continuously.
system and status of the vehicle battery. • If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical Charge Warning Light” in “Understanding Your Instru-
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving ment Panel” for further information.
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads. and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. reduction:
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery • Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current • Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
drive cycle. • Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery • HVAC System
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
instrument cluster.
• Audio and Telematics System
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
that the charging system cannot sustain. following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The What to do when an electrical load reduction action
charging system is still functioning properly. message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, During a trip:
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports) • Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior) 4
frequent stopping).
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electri- 115V AC, USB ports
cal accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar de- – Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
vices.
– Check the audio settings (volume)
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
After a trip:
parking periods).
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (ad-
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
ditional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio sys-
(weeks, months).
tems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged Ignition Off Draw currents).
completely.
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on and parking time).
when the vehicle was parked.
• The vehicle should have service performed if the mes-
• The battery was used for an extended period with the sage is still present during consecutive trips and the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game help to identify the cause.
consoles and similar devices.
CYBERSECURITY
WARNING!
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These • It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa- possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
tion. This information allows systems and features in your breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
vehicle to function properly. including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea- result in an accident involving serious injury or
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful death.
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. • ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com- software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
updates to improve the usability and performance of your breached.
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and • As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
unlawful access to your vehicle systems. ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your dealer immediately.
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
NOTE: UCONNECT SETTINGS
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
software updates. touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners and change the customer programmable features. Many
should: features can vary by vehicle. 4
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices - If
Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 Radio” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
Uconnect 3.0 Power Hard Button
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And
On The Faceplate Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons On The Faceplate Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect Personal Settings
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, Push the MORE or SETTINGS button on the faceplate, then
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen (if equipped)
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument to display the settings menu screen. In this mode the
panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and Uconnect system allows you to access programmable fea- 4
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the tures that may be equipped such as Display, Units, Voice,
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
(i.e., ON, OFF). Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off Options, Suspen-
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Back sion, Trailer Brake, Audio, Compass Settings, Phone/
buttons located below the Uconnect system. Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore Settings,
Clear Personal Data and System Information.
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect
touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
turn the touchscreen on. When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode,
option on the Uconnect system. press and release the preferred setting until the button is
highlighted. Once the setting is complete, either press the
Buttons On The Touchscreen back arrow or the “Done” button on the touchscreen or the
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu.
display. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen
on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the list of available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the RUN position.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options

Display Mode Auto Manual
Set Language English, Français, Español
NOTE:
If Arabic is selected as the vehicle language, the voice recognition and text messaging features will not function.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Units — If Equipped
After pressing “Units” on the touchscreen, the following
will be available:

Units US Metric
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the

Voice Response Length Brief Detailed 4
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:

Set Time 12 hour 24 hour
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time” feature, press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select
“AM” or “PM.”
Set Date Up Arrow Down Arrow
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sounds and Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and
the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the prox-
imity to other objects.
Front ParkSense Chime Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Chime Volume — If Equipped Low Med High
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the
ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move
back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see ac-
tive guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The im-
age will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned
ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to ten seconds after shifting out of RE- 4
VERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the igni-
tion is switched to the OFF position.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wip-
ers if it senses moisture on the windshield.
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Hill Start Assist” feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system becomes active.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the

Headlight Off Delay 0 30 60 90
Headlight Illumina- 0 30 60 90
tion On Approach
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on when the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With On Off
Wipers — If
Equipped
Auto Dim High On Off
Beams — If
Equipped
Flash Lights With On Off
Lock
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or un-
locked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 4
15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmis-
sion is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Remote Door Unlock All Driver
NOTE:
The “Remote Door Unlock” feature will allow you to program your remote door locks to open “All doors” or only
the “Driver door” with the first push of the key fob or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle.
Sound Horn With Remote On Off
Start
NOTE:
When the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is acti-
vated.

Memory Linked To Fob — On Off
If Equipped
NOTE:
• The “Memory Linked To Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
• The seat will return to the memorized seat location if “Memory Linked To Fob” is set to (On) when the key fob is
used to unlock the door.
Passive Entry — If On Off
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or un-
locked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated On Off
Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle 4
Start — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected the driv-
er’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
Easy Exit Seats — If
Equipped
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
Engine Off Power Delay 0 sec 45 sec 5 min 10 min

Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped On Off
Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:

Sound Horn With Lower On Off
Flash Lights With Lower On Off
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Entry/Exit Suspension” feature is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height posi-
tion when vehicle shifted to park for easy entry/exit.
Display Suspension Messages All Warning Only
Automatic Aero Mode (1500 Model On Off
Only)
NOTE:
When the “Automatic Aero Mode” feature is selected, the Ride Height will automatically be adjusted depending on
the vehicle speed.
Tire Jack Mode On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension, while
the vehicle is on a jack changing a tire.

Transport Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode
4
NOTE:
The “Wheel Alignment Mode” feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel align-
ment service. Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be enabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for
Trailer Brake
After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touch-

Trailer Select Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
Trailer Brake Type Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the

Balance/Fade Speaker Icon (Arrow Buttons) C
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or
use the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
Speed Adjusted Vol- Off 1 2 3
ume
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound — On Off
If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.

AUX Volume Offset On Off
— If Equipped
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input. 4
Loudness — If On Off
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the

Variance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
NOTE:
• Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the
compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
• Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptops and
Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sen-
sor, and it may give false readings.
Perform Compass Calibra- On Off
tion
NOTE: Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating,
which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic
until it is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the “ON” button on the touchscreen and com-
pleting one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will now
function normally.
Compass Variance Map

Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-

Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information,
refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-

Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the
“Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-

Restore Settings Yes Cancel 4
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their de-
fault settings. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to de-
fault?” select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. If “Yes” is se-
lected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “Can-
cel” to exit.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
System Information System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying
the system software version. You can also update your maps with a USB device. Please see your authorized dealer for
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
8.4/8.4 NAV Personal Settings screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting until a
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the settings check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you
to access programmable features that may be equipped either press the back arrow button on the touchscreen or
the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close
Engine Off Options, Suspension, Trailer Brake, Audio, out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore
will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of
Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
available settings.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the RUN position.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the

Display Mode Day Night Auto 4
NOTE:
When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to
activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
Display Brightness With + –
Headlights ON
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With + –
Headlights OFF
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.

Set Theme Pre-configured Themes
Set Language English, Français, Español
NOTE:
Arabic is available for the navigation system (if equipped) only.
Touchscreen Beep
Navigation Turn-By-Turn
In Cluster — If Equipped
Controls Screen Time-Out
— If Equipped
Fuel Saver Display — If
Equipped
Units — If Equipped
After pressing “Units” on the touchscreen, the following
will be available:

Units US Metric
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the

Voice Response Length Brief Detailed 4
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the

Sync Time With GPS — If
Equipped
Set Time Hours + –
Set Time Minutes + –
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
Show Time In Status Bar — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

ParkSense Sound Only Sound and Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h).
Front ParkSense Chime Low Med High
Volume
Rear ParkSense Chime Low Med High
Volume
Tilt Side Mirrors In Re-
verse — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when
the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will
move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.

ParkView Backup Camera
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of
the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed 4
on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above
the rear License plate.
ParkView Backup Camera On Off
Active Guidelines
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see Ac-
tive (Dynamic) Guidelines which deflect with steering wheel angle over the ParkView Back up Camera display when-
ever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with
a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
ParkView Backup Camera On Off
Delay
NOTE:
When the “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView Backup Camera display to
remain on while in drive for up to ten seconds, or 8 mph (12 km/h).

Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
— If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wip-
ers if it senses moisture on the windshield.
Hill Start Assist — If On Off
Equipped

Two Or Four Corner Air Tire Jack Mode Transport Mode Wheel Alignment Protection Mode
Suspension Modes — If Mode
Equipped
NOTE:
There are four air suspension modes designed to protect the system in unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to
assist in changing a spare tire. Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being flat bed towed. Wheel
Alignment Mode is selected before performing a wheel alignment, refer to your authorized dealer for information.
Protection Mode will automatically be selected to “protect” the air suspension system when the payload has been ex-
ceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the

Headlight Off Delay + – 4
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30,
60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Headlight Illumination On Ap- + –
proach
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0,
30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the head-
lights will turn on approximately ten seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

Auto Dim High Beams — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under
certain conditions.
Flash Lights With Lock
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lamps will flash when the doors are locked or un-
locked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-

Auto Door Locks 4
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the trans-
mission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are
locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” fea-
ture selected.

Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote
Start
1st Press Of Key Fob Un- Driver Door All Doors
locks
NOTE:
• When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press
of the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
• When “All Doors” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
• If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors”, all doors will unlock no matter which
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed,
only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped.
• With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed pushing the handle more than
once will only result in the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver’s door is opened,
the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons.

Personal Settings Linked
To Key Fob — If
Equipped
NOTE:
• The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver 4
mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
• The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to on) when
the key fob is used to unlock the door.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the

Auto-On Driver Heated/ Off Remote Start All Starts
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected the driv-
er’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the

Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is
shut off.

Engine Off Power Delay + –
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay + –
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30,
60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Air Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:

Sound Horn With Lower 4
NOTE:
When the “Sound Horn With Lower” feature is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the key fob remote
lower button is pressed.
Flash Lights With Lower
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lower” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the key fob
remote lower button is pressed twice. This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lower feature
selected.
Suspension Display Messages All Warning
Automatic Aero Mode (1500 Model
Only)
NOTE:
When the “Automatic Aero Mode” feature is selected, the Ride Height will automatically be adjusted depending on
the vehicle speed.

Tire Jack Mode
NOTE:
When the “Tire Jack Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare
tire.
Transport Mode
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system lowers and then disables to assist with flat
bed towing.
NOTE:
Before performing a wheel alignment, the “Wheel Alignment Mode” must be enabled. Refer to your authorized
dealer for further information.
Trailer Brake
After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touch-
Trailer Select Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
Trailer Brake Type Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH 4
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon (Arrow Buttons) C
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or
use the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
Speed Adjusted Volume OFF 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.

Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input.
Phone Settings
After pressing the “Phone Settings” button on the touch-
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto
Reply Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones and Audio Sources List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Sources” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and
Audio Sources Settings system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using 4
one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you
will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-

Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the

Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the

System Information System Software Information Screen 4
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying
the system software version.
UCONNECT RADIOS IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Radio 3.0, Uconnect Located inside the center console upper lid, this feature
3.0, Uconnect 5.0, or Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV radio, refer to allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into
your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. the USB port.
iPod control supports the following: iPod/iPod classic,
iPod mini, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, iPod touch, and iPhone
devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully sup-
port the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s website
for software updates.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the back
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub

1 — USB Port
2— Aux Jack
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s

Manual Supplement or visit UconnectPhone.com. Remote Sound System Controls (Rearview Of Steering
Wheel)
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control will CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
switch modes to Radio, CD or other valid audio sources. To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a precautions:
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, 4
each mode. wiping from center to edge.
Radio Operation 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
SEEK down for the next listenable station. or anti-static sprays.
The button located in the center of the left hand control will 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
tune to the next pre-set station that you have programmed
in the radio pre-set buttons. 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
CD Player — If Equipped 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or
current track begins to play. have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the considering disc player service.
second track. If you push the switch up or down three
times, it will play the third, etc.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is not
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it
before turning on the wireless radio.
is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or
off during mobile device operation when not using The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Uconnect (if equipped). Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Regulatory And Safety Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nev- 2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
ertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
that the radio is 8 inches (20 centimeters) or further from tion.
the human body. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines by the party responsible for compliance could void the
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen- user’s authority to operate the equipment.
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
NOTE: CLIMATE CONTROLS
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to temperature, airflow, and direction of air circulating
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer- instrument panel below the radio.
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener- 4
Manual Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen —
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
If Equipped
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu- The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer- system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
ence will not occur in a particular installation. dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can be
set to obtain desired interior conditions.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for
help.
Manual Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen

Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Setting
Rotate the Temperature Control Knob counterclockwise until it is set to MAX A/C. This is the
coldest setting and will put the A/C to its maximum power.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the
A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Icon Description
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side win-
dow demist outlets. When the defrost setting is selected, the blower level will increase. Use De-
frost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. 4
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment.
Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates
cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer tempera-
tures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control knob to regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the con-
trol clockwise from the off position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
Icon Description
Modes Control: Rotate the Mode Control Knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution
mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Economy Mode
CAUTION!
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Rotate
the heating elements:
the temperature control knob to the desired temperature.
Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor • Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
modes. dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a 4
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
Climate Controls With a Touchscreen
5.0 With Automatic Temperature Controls

8.4/8.4 NAV With Manual Temperature Controls

8.4/8.4 NAV With Automatic Temperature Controls

Control Descriptions
NOTE: Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle
equipment.
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. 4
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate,
to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Icon Description
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and auto-
matic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to
change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature
is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button
is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature set-
tings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate,
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after ten minutes.
Icon Description
Uconnect 5.0 Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons — If Equipped
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow
button on the faceplate, press the up arrow button on the touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature set-
Uconnect 8.4 tings. Push the down arrow button on the faceplate, press the down arrow button on the touch- 4
screen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen
for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature
will move up and down with the driver’s temperature, when it is increased and decreased, re-
spectively.
SYNC Button — If Equipped

Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indica-
tor is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger tem-
perature setting with the driver temperature setting. The SYNC feature also synchronizes the
rear passengers’ temperature to the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger tem-
perature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
Faceplate Knob Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Icon Description
Touchscreen • Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
Buttons the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Icon Description
Mix Mode Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button 4
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the faceplate button, to turn the Cli-
mate Control System off.
Climate Control Functions

CAUTION!
A/C (Air Conditioning)
the heating elements: The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win- manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat- cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
with warm water. blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
NOTE: Recirculation
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
the windows. The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed. Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located to excessive window fogging. On systems with Manual
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
the radiator and through the condenser. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is
selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
MAX A/C mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- then turn off.
mance. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the Equipped
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is Automatic Operation
on.
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be button on the touchscreen (if equipped) on the Auto-
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings matic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system Manual Operation Override
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger This system offers a full complement of manual override
temperature control buttons. Once the desired tempera- features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
ture is displayed, the system will achieve and automati- be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
cally maintain that comfort level. mode.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the pres- 4
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience ence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
function automatically. glass.
NOTE: Operating Tips
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible. Summer Operation
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units The engine cooling system must be protected with a
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable fea- high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
ture. protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in hicle” for proper coolant selection.
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Winter Operation NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will auto-
matically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance Procedure” in Outside Air Intake
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
Vacation/Storage odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake is
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi- clear of ice, slush and snow.
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air Cabin Air Filter
with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate
The climate control system has a cabin air filter that filters
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compres-
out dust and pollen from the air. Refer to “Maintenance
sor damage when the system is started again.
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter re-
Window Fogging placement instructions.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost on
the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the
front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode
without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
Control Settings Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions Chart

PERSONALIZED MENU BAR The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut.
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow NOTE: This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
these steps: PARK.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION

Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 3.0, 5.0 or
8.4/8.4 NAV system.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu

1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
Uconnect 3.0
Uconnect 5.0
Uconnect 8.4 NAV

If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect
8.4 system.
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conver-
sations are examples of noise that may impact recogni-
tion.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned in the
headliner and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first Voice Recognition (VR)/Phone Buttons
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the
1 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate
beep, then say your Voice Command. Functions
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts 2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Two buttons are all you need to control your Uconnect
system with your voice.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
4
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the screen.
Uconnect 3.0
Uconnect 5.0
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV

Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM 4
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button and say
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
Uconnect 3.0 Radio
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio

Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxil-
iary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the 4
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB Uconnect 3.0 Media
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: For the Uconnect 3.0, Uconnect 5.0 and 8.4/8.4 NAV
systems, select Browse to see all of the music on your iPod
or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly
how the artist, album, song and genre information is
displayed.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media

Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated for
the Uconnect 3.0, Uconnect 5.0 and 8.4/8.4 NAV radios,
your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mo-
bile phone compatibility and pairing instructions. 4
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the
following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number) Uconnect 3.0 Phone
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone

Voice Text Reply TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
Phone button and say Listen. (Must have compatible this feature. For details about MAP, visit
mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.) UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple 4
Phone button . After the beep, say: “Reply.”
iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
Start without
No. I’ll be late.
me.
Okay. Where are you? I will be
Are you there <number>
Call me. minutes late.
yet?
I need See you in
I’ll call you later. iPhone Notification Settings
directions. <number> of
1 — Select “Settings”
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right minutes.
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
I’m lost. now. Thanks. 3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
command will not work to adjust the heated seat, vented Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate
seat, or the steering wheel, if equipped. Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 8.4 system. See your dealer to activate navigation
at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the
beep, say:
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.” Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV)
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.” WARNING!
2. Then follow the system prompts. ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button . After and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 4
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.” 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-

rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on
the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Navigation Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance 1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Vehicle Finder
Send ‘N Go
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
Assist Button
***Extra charges apply. 2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
Vehicle Health Alert 3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your ve-
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a hicle and handle all of the details.
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner press the “Apps ” button on the touchscreen to
Connect website moparownerconnect.com. “Register By Web” to complete the process using your
Register (8.4/8.4 NAV) smartphone or computer.
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV) • Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
mands and sending a destination from your phone to your
vehicle. • Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send
a location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle 4
Finder and Send ‘n Go , if equipped.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner of
the app to bring up app settings
Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After the
beep, say the following command: “Send message to
John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message
you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to process
Mobile App
your message.
To use the Uconnect Access Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your Uconnect Access ser- 3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
vices, download the Uconnect Access app to your mo- provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
bile device. Use your Owner Account login and pass- hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
word to open the app. what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy with
your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a TIP:
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice • Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if your
to send a personalized text message. For details about vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. voice to send a text message.
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text • Messages are limited to 140 characters.
messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these four simple steps: • The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps ” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen,
push the VR button , then say: “YELP search.”
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
iPhone Notification Settings Uconnect the place or business that you’d like Uconnect
1 — Select “Settings” to find.
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications” results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Dis-
tance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
4
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Yelp
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not
available for 8.4 system or vehicles sold in the Canadian
market.) SiriusXM Travel Link
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages, and many
other useful requests.
Siri Eyes Free Available

Getting Started 1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles sound
system. Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone.
Supplement for a detailed pairing procedure.
Siri Enable Screens

1 — Select Settings On Your 3 — Select Siri
iPhone 4 — Enable Siri Voice Recognition (VR)/Phone Buttons
2 — Select General 1 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
NOTE: A push and release of the button will start
normal embedded VR functions. The push and hold,
then release of the button will start Siri functions.
2. After the double beep, begin speaking to Siri.
Examples of Siri commands and questions:
• ⬙Play Rolling Stones⬙
• ⬙Send text message to John⬙
• ⬙Read text message from Sarah⬙
• ⬙Take me to the nearest coffee shop⬙
NOTE:
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead to ensure your command is
understood.
Siri Eyes Free
• Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later. Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text mes- General Information
sage, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
send it to voicemail. Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Automatic reply messages can be: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.” with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 4
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
touchscreen while typing a custom message. 2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected tion.
so you can still place a second call without being inter- NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
rupted by incoming calls. by the party responsible for compliance could void the
NOTE: user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
Additional Information
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp
logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trade-
marks of Yelp.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-
855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-
465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 ▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 1500 Models
Only (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 2500/3500 5
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/STOP
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Idle Shutdown — 6.4L Engine Only . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped . .403
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C) . .373
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 (Four-Position Switch) — If Equipped . . . . . . . .406
▫ After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 ▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Five-Position Switch) — If Equipped . . . . . . . .411
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .375
▫ Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
(Eight Speed Transmission Only) —
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .377 ▫ Five-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Eight Speed Transmission Only) —
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (1500 MODELS) — IF 䡵 AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED). . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 䡵 STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
WAGON ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
䡵 SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . . . . .431
ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle
䡵 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (REBEL MODELS ONLY) Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand. . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
▫ Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . . . . .438 ▫ Hill Climbing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 ▫ Driving Through Water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
䡵 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (2500/3500 MODELS) — ▫ Airing Down For Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . .455
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Vehicle Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ After Driving Off-Road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
䡵 LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . . . . .441
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Acceleration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
▫ Traction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ Hydraulic Brake Assist — 2500/3500 Models Only
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
(Except Power Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ After Driving Off-Road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 5
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . .483
䡵 WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY (IF
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). . . . . .483
EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Things To Know Before Using Your Winch . . . . .463
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Understanding The Features Of Your Winch . . . .465
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Winch Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Operating Your Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Rigging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
䡵 POWER STEERING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Electric Power Steering — 1500 Models . . . . . . .478
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Hydraulic Power Steering —
2500/3500 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 ▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped . . . .492
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . . .493
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . .517
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . .499 ▫ Directional Tires — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . . .500 ▫ Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .501 䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . .508
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .521
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) 3500 Series
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Trucks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 ▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles. . . . . . . . .529 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . . .530 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 ▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538 5
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 ▫ Common Towing Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 ▫ Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Towing Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 䡵 SNOWPLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 ▫ 1500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 ▫ 2500/3500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND ▫ Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .557
▫ Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
The starter should not be operated for more than 10-second cause serious injury or death.
intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such intervals
will protect the starter from overheating. Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK position.
WARNING! 5
Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
NOTE:
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖ mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. • This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift inter-
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access locking system. The brake pedal must be pressed to shift
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a out of PARK.
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of • If equipped with an 8 speed transmission starting the
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible unless the Manual
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the Park Release has been activated. For the Manual Park
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Release operation refer to Manual Park Release in “What
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in To Do In Emergencies”.
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- Tip Start Feature
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch
operate power windows, other controls, or move the briefly to the START position and release it. The starter
vehicle. motor will continue to run and will automatically disen-
gage when the engine is running.
(Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
This feature allows the driver to operate
the ignition switch with the push of a To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
button, as long as the Remote Start/ Button
Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
passenger compartment.
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/ pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 MPH
STOP Button (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition
1. The transmission must be in PARK. will remain in the ACC mode until the gear selector is in
PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. 4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. speed above 5 MPH (8 km/h), the instrument cluster
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage will display a “ Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
automatically after 10 seconds. engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the PARK position, or it could roll.
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE AutoPark — Rotary Shifter and 8-Speed Trans Only
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle (If Equipped)
speed below 5 MPH (8 km/h), the engine will shut off and AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the
the ignition will remain in the ACC position. If vehicle vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following
speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied
AutoPark. See AutoPark section for further details. upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driv- vehicle into PARK.
er’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL 5
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
Position)
outlined on the following pages.
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN.
WARNING!
To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle • Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
and use the accessories, follow these directions: vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode. that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid
(not blinking) “P” is indicated in the Instrument
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place Cluster Display and near the gear selector. If the ⴖPⴖ
the ignition to the ACC mode. indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time an added precaution, always apply the parking brake
to place the ignition to the RUN mode. when exiting the vehicle.
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not de-
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to signed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into
return the ignition to the OFF mode. PARK. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the • Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark. • Driver’s door is ajar
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met: • Brake Pedal is not depressed
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift
transmission
to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
• Vehicle is not in PARK
NOTE: In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
• Vehicle Speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the “ Au-
• Ignition switched from RUN to ACC toPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear” to not be
seen. In these cases, the shifter must be returned to “P” to
NOTE: For Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The engine will select desired gear.
turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC mode.
After 30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF automati- If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
cally, unless the driver turns the ignition switch OFF. may AutoPark.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may Au- MPH (1.9 km/h) or less.
toPark. The MESSAGE “ Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met: P”will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h).
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed
transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Not Engaged” will be dis-
WARNING!
played in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the ve- Driver’s Door is closed.
hicle speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km). A vehicle ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added PARK by looking for the ⬙P⬙ in the Instrument Cluster
precaution, always apply the parking brake when Display and near the shifter. As an added precaution,
exiting the vehicle. always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. 5
4WD LOW — If Equipped Idle Shutdown — 6.4L Engine Only
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in This feature can be enabled so that the truck will automati-
4WD LOW. cally shutdown when the truck has been idling for a set
period of time when the engine is at operating tempera-
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in
ture. Idle time can be set in 5 minute increments between 5
the instrument cluster.
and 60 minutes. See your local authorized dealer to enable
Additional customer warnings will be given when all of this feature.
these conditions are met:
NOTE: The idle shut down timer is disabled while the PTO
• Vehicle is not in PARK is active.
• Driver’s Door is ajar Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
• Vehicle is in 4WD LOW range To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
while the engine is cranking. This should clear any excess can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
fuel in case the engine is flooded. “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 further information.
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the
accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 CAUTION!
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
WARNING! engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing have enough power to continue running when the ignition
serious personal injury. button/key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor.
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans- Release the accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel once the engine is running smoothly.
could enter the catalytic converter and once the If the engine shows no sign of starting after a 10 second
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter period of engine cranking with the accelerator pedal held
and vehicle. to the floor, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
(Continued)
After Starting The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
WARNING!
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a cord could cause electrocution.
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, 5
three-wire extension cord. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
1500 Models
CAUTION!
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
assembly. It is located between the front grill and the precautions are not observed:
radiator, but underneath the black upper seal. • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
2500/3500 Models • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille by or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
the right front tow hook. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered
strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
in use for the winter months. During winter months, shifting out of PARK.
remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on the
c-clip.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re- movement and possible injury or damage.
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
pressing the brake pedal. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure ing the vehicle.
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, (or, with Keyless mission gear selector.
Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode) • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the a location accessible to children), and do not leave
vehicle against unwanted movement. the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from could operate power windows, other controls, or
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. move the vehicle.
(Continued)
Key Ignition Park Interlock Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock Equipped
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal) gear selector located on the instrument panel. The trans-
position. The key fob can only be removed from the mission gear range (PRND) is displayed both above the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear
and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the range, simply rotate the gear selector. You must press the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position. brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or 5
NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
key fob in the ignition to warn you that this safety feature
Park to Drive), simply rotate the gear selector to the
is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal
the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service.
driving.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
the ON/RUN mode (engine running, for vehicles with precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
eight-speed transmission) and the brake pedal must be (kilometers).
pressed.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
In 8-speed vehicles, the brake pedal must also be pressed to accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE, Gear Ranges
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual downshifts can DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift NEUTRAL into another gear range.
control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation⬙
in this section for further information). Pressing the NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
GEAR-/GEAR+ switches (on the steering wheel) while in allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
the DRIVE position will select the highest available trans- is especially important when the engine is cold.
mission gear, and will display that gear limit in the PARK (P)
instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Some models will display
both the selected gear limit, and the actual current gear, This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
while in ERS mode. transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake. • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
• Shift the transmission into PARK. the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
• Turn the engine OFF.
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
• Remove the key fob. verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
WARNING! engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly 5
pressing the brake pedal.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
movement and possible injury or damage.
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position (or, with Keyless
ing the vehicle.
Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode),
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
(Continued)
vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into PARK:
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to • Look at the transmission gear position display and
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or blinking.
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to • With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans- will not move out of PARK.
mission gear selector.
REVERSE (R)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child stop.
could operate power windows, other controls, or
NEUTRAL (N)
move the vehicle.
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
CAUTION! periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK vehicle.
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DRIVE (D)
WARNING!
This range should be used for most city and highway
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
that limit your response to changing traffic or road upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
have a collision. operating conditions.
5
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
CAUTION!
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause towing a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation⬙ in this section for
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information) to select a lower gear range. Under
further information. these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or be-
low), transmission operation may be modified depending
on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmis-
sion temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode 3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. On vehicles with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the ignition switch
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
until the engine turns OFF.
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
5. Restart the engine.
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the engine 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The operation.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-
be necessary.
tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
service is required.
following steps:
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation —
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
Eight-Speed Transmission
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired loca- The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
tion (preferably, at your authorized dealer). driver to limit the highest available gear when the trans-
mission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmis-
1. Stop the vehicle.
sion gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift shift above fourth gear (except to prevent engine over-
the transmission to NEUTRAL. speed), but will shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR+
vehicle speed. When the transmission gear selector is in switch until the gear limit display disappears from the
DRIVE, the transmission will operate automatically, shift- instrument cluster.
ing between all available gears. Tapping the GEAR- switch
(on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode, display the WARNING!
current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as
the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
GEAR- or GEAR+ switch will change the top available slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or 5
gear.
personal injury.
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode

When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs,
push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL
mode. This will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting.
1 — GEAR - Switch 2 — GEAR + Switch

WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving in
icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine brak-
ing can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle
to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle
control, which may cause an accident possibly result-
ing in personal injury or death.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 1500 Models

Only (If Equipped)
The transmission gear position display (located in the
TOW/HAUL Switch instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the The gear selector is mounted either on the right side of the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has steering column (if equipped) or on the console (if
been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores equipped). You must press the brake pedal to move the
normal operation. Normal operation is always the default gear selector out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission
at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the
switch must be pushed each time the engine is started. gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE
position. Pull the gear selector toward you when shifting
into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK
(column shift only).
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a pre- NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
cise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self- allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle is especially important when the engine is cold.
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
PARK (P)
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers). This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be 5
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
range.
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE, When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift brake.
control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation” When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
in this section for further information). Pressing the ERS shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
(-/+) switches (column shift) or moving the gear selector to the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
the left or right (-/+) (console shift) while in the DRIVE to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
position will select the highest available transmission gear, precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
and will display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
1, 2, 3, etc. Some models will display both the selected gear
limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode. NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
Gear Ranges
When exiting the vehicle, always:
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
• Apply the parking brake.
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
• Remove the key fob. those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
WARNING! running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle LOCK/OFF (key removal) position (or, with Keyless
movement and possible injury or damage. Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode),
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear vehicle against unwanted movement.
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit- ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
ing the vehicle. the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re- of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly mission gear selector.
pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave • Look at the transmission gear position display and
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child • With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
could operate power windows, other controls, or will not move out of PARK.
move the vehicle.
REVERSE (R) 5
CAUTION! This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN NEUTRAL (N)
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
damage to the gear selector could result. periods with the engine running. The engine may be
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position: Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
• When shifting into PARK, pull the column-mounted ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
gear selector toward you and move it all the way that limit your response to changing traffic or road
counterclockwise until it stops. For console-mounted conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
shifter, firmly move the gear selector all the way forward have a collision.
and to the left until it stops.
Operation” in this section for further information) to select
CAUTION!
a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other gear range will improve performance and extend transmis-
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmis-
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for sion shift schedule and expand the range of torque con-
further information. verter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent trans-
DRIVE (D) mission damage due to overheating.
This range should be used for most city and highway If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate
upshifts through underdrive first and second gears, direct differently until the transmission cools down.
third gear and overdrive fourth and fifth gears. The DRIVE NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
position provides optimum driving characteristics under vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
all normal operating conditions. grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
To access all six available gears, you must use the Elec- these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a sig-
tronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, described below. nificant additional heat load on the cooling system. Down-
shifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear (when
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while generation.
towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera- be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm following steps:
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi-
mum efficiency. Engagement of both the torque converter
clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the 2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). During ex- 5
tremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), opera- 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
tion may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only.
Normal operation will resume once the transmission tem-
perature has risen to a suitable level. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
Transmission Limp Home Mode
operation.
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. service is required.
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation — third (direct) gear, when you tap the gear selector/switch
Six-Speed Transmission (1500 Models Only) one time in the (-) direction, the display will show 4 (ERS
4 is direct gear). Another tap down (-) will shift the
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
transmission down to ERS 3 (the added underdrive gear).
driver to limit the highest available gear when the trans-
Once in ERS mode, tapping (-) or (+) will change the top
mission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmis-
available gear.
shift above fourth gear, but will shift through the lower
gears normally.
Use of ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an addi-
tional underdrive gear which is not normally used during
through-gear accelerations. This additional gear can im-
prove vehicle performance and cooling capability when
towing a trailer on certain grades. In ERS mode, gears 1
though 3 are underdrive gears, and ERS 4 is direct drive.
ERS 5 and 6 (Overdrive gears) are the same as the normal
fourth and fifth gears.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE Column Gear Selector
position, the transmission will operate automatically, shift-
ing between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-) switch
(column shift) or tapping the gear selector to the left (-)
(console shift) will activate ERS mode, display the current
gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top
available gear. For example, if you are in DRIVE and are in
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
gear selector to the left (-) (console shift) or the ERS (-)
switch down (column shift). The transmission will shift to
the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
CAUTION!
When using ERS for engine braking while descending 5
steep grades, be careful not to overspeed the engine.
Apply the brakes as needed to prevent engine over-
speed.
Console Gear Selector Overdrive Operation
To exit ERS mode, simply hold the gear selector to the right
The automatic transmission includes an electronically con-
(+) (console shift) or press and hold the ERS (+) switch
trolled Overdrive (fourth and fifth gears). The transmission
(column shift) until the gear limit display disappears from
will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following
the instrument cluster.
conditions are present:
WARNING! • The gear selector is in the DRIVE position,
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a • The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip perature,
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or • The engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an adequate
personal injury. temperature,
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high,
• The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated, and
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
potential for transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode,
transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission
will automatically downshift (for engine braking) when the
throttle is closed and/or during steady braking maneu- TOW/HAUL Switch
vers. The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. Normal operation is always the default
at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving in transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear,
icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine brak- until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
ing can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because
to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle top gear is disabled, and the engine speed is higher
control, which may cause an accident possibly result- when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
ing in personal injury or death. seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when 5
cold. This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select
Torque Converter Clutch
(ERS) shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A shift into and out of Overdrive.
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmis-
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
sion into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
partially draining from the torque converter into the
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds after starting the engine.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 2500/3500 The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
Models Only NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts
can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
The transmission gear position display (located in the
control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation”
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
in this section for further information). Pressing the ERS
The gear selector is mounted on the right side of the
(-/+) switches (on the gear selector) while in the DRIVE
steering column. You must press the brake pedal to move
position will select the highest available transmission gear,
the gear selector out of PARK (refer to “Brake/
and will display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as
Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section for
1, 2, 3, etc. Some models will display both the selected gear
further information). To drive, move the gear selector from
limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. Pull the gear
selector toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK, Gear Ranges
or when shifting out of PARK.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a pre- NEUTRAL into another gear range.
cise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
is especially important when the engine is cold.
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers). PARK (P)
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
between these gears. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
WARNING!
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult movement and possible injury or damage.
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear 5
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the ing the vehicle.
transfer case is in a drive position. • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
When exiting the vehicle, always: the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
• Apply the parking brake. vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
• Shift the transmission into PARK. verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
• Turn the engine OFF.
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
• Remove the key fob. pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, • Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position (or, with Keyless mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode), damage to the gear selector could result.
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
vehicle against unwanted movement. or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the damage the drivetrain.
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
• When shifting into PARK, pull the gear selector toward
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
stops.
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans- • Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully seated
mission gear selector. in the PARK gate.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in • Look at the transmission gear position display and
a location accessible to children), and do not leave verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child • With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
could operate power windows, other controls, or will not move out of PARK.
move the vehicle.
REVERSE (R)
CAUTION!
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
stop. reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
NEUTRAL (N) Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
periods with the engine running. The engine may be further information. 5
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the DRIVE (D)
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
This range should be used for most city and highway
WARNING! driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the upshifts through underdrive first, second, and third gears,
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth and sixth gears. The
that limit your response to changing traffic or road DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and under all normal operating conditions.
have a collision.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a sig-
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) nificant additional heat load on the cooling system. Down-
Operation” in this section for further information) to select shifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear (when
a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped
gear range will improve performance and extend transmis- in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. generation.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmis- modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
sion shift schedule and expand the range of torque con- ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
verter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent trans- up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi-
mission damage due to overheating. mum efficiency. Engagement of both the torque converter
clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger
transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under
of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). During ex-
Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate
tremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), opera-
differently until the transmission cools down.
tion may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only.
Normal operation will resume once the transmission tem-
perature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. service is required.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. 5
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans- driver to limit the highest available gear when the trans-
mission. mission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmis-
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
shift above fourth gear, but will shift through the lower
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
gears normally.
following steps:
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
2. Shift the transmission into PARK. position, the transmission will operate automatically, shift-
ing between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-) switch
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available
gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping (-) or (+) will change the
top available gear.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply push and hold the
ERS (-) switch. The transmission will shift to the range
from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
CAUTION!
When using ERS for engine braking while descending
steep grades, be careful not to overspeed the engine.
Apply the brakes as needed to prevent engine over-
speed.
Overdrive Operation
Column Gear Selector
The automatic transmission includes an electronically con-
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the ERS (+) switch
trolled Overdrive (fifth and sixth gears). The transmission
until the gear limit display disappears from the instrument
will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following
cluster.
conditions are present:
WARNING! • The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
perature.
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
• The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
ture.
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
5
potential for transmission overheating or failure due to TOW/HAUL Switch
excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode, The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
will automatically downshift (for engine braking) when the been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
throttle is closed and/or during steady braking maneu- normal operation. Normal operation is always the default
vers. at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving in transmission will not shift to sixth gear, until the trans-
icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine brak- mission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after
ing can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because sixth gear is
to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle disabled, and engine speed is higher when the torque
control, which may cause an accident possibly result- converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
ing in personal injury or death. transmission is not shifting properly when cold. This is
normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
Torque Converter Clutch
control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A and out of Overdrive.
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmis-
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
sion into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
partially draining from the torque converter into the
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds after starting the engine.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED

Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a manu-
ally shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted trans-
fer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your
transfer case, located in this section for further information.
Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped 4L
The transfer case provides four mode positions: Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks the front
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H) and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H) maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
• Neutral (N) only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L) This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
5
position for normal street and highway conditions such as
For additional information on the appropriate use of each dry, hard surfaced roads.
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L
2H positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads. same speed. This is accomplished by simply moving the
gear selector to the desired positions once the appropriate
4H
speed and gear requirements are met, refer to “Shifting
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range locks the Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer Case” in this section
front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and for further information.
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on
NEUTRAL (N) dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear damage to the driveline components.
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the instru- NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
ment cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
four-wheel drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
locked together. This light will illuminate when the transfer
case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position. There is no WARNING!
light for the 2H or NEUTRAL positions on some models.
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions at TRAL position without first fully engaging the park-
a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine ing brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disen-
and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). gages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause should always be applied when the driver is not in the
damage to the drivetrain. vehicle.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to
driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted Transfer NOTE:
Case • Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles equipped
2H To 4H with an automatic transmission may require shutting the
engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the transmission into
stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion, shifts can
NEUTRAL, hold your foot on the brake, and turn the
be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the vehicle in engine OFF. Complete the range shift to the desired
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
mode. 5
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after com-
pleting the shift. Apply a constant force when shifting the • Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
transfer case lever. completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due
to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned.
2H Or 4H To 4L Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth align-
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4L some gear noise ment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
to the vehicle or occupants. 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
5 km/h).
the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case • Do not attempt to shift into or out of 4L while the
lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in transmission is in gear.
transfer case NEUTRAL. Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the instru-
ment cluster is used to alert the driver that the front axle is
fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Four-Position • Neutral (NEUTRAL)
Switch) — If Equipped For additional information on the appropriate use of each
The electronic shift transfer case is operated by the 4WD transfer case mode position, see the information below:
Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located on
2WD
the instrument panel.
Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi-
mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range pro-
vides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces
only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
Four-Position/Part Time Transfer Case driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode same speed. This range provides additional traction and
positions: maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)

• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
NEUTRAL (N) NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on
the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recre-
ational towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
5
street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads. 4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate
the current and desired transfer case selection. When you
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
will do the following:
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
shifting instructions.
transfer case completes the shift.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD 3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
driveline components. Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
to flash. or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to
3. The transfer case will not shift.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the
to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
control switch back to the current position, wait five
(40 km/h).
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements,
refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer case, Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
located in this section. tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
drivetrain.
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
and that service is required. speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
injury.
Shifting Procedure
WARNING!
NOTE:
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU- • If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
TRAL position without first fully engaging the park- position have not been met, the transfer case will not
ing brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disen- shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
gages both the front and rear drive shafts from the tion will remain ON and the newly selected position
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
5
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake ments for the selected position have been met. To retry a
should always be applied when the driver is not in the shift: return the control switch back to the original
vehicle. position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
2WD To 4WD LOCK Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use
Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
either of the following procedures:
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, Preferred Procedure
the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you mo-
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph
mentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the
(3 to 5 km/h).
control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch
must be in the ON position with the engine either running 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
or off. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control switch
is in the ACC position.
to the desired position.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected
position indicator light will flash and the original position Alternate Procedure
indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW 2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants. position.
NOTE: Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Five-Position
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Switch) — If Equipped
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift, This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
then the desired position indicator light will flash con- the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
tinuously while the original position indicator light is located on the instrument panel.
ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to 5
be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, the shift will not take place and no position
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case

This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode
positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD AUTO)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
For additional information on the appropriate use of each only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NEUTRAL (N)
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads. behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
4WD AUTO “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
power to the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) or four-
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and
loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road con- highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving
ditions. the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits
as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
4WD LOCK
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi- be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the
mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this
4WD LOW mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD
mode.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD, 4LOW,
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument cluster and
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by indicate the current and desired transfer case selection.
rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position. When you select a different transfer case position, the
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific indicator lights will do the following:
shifting instructions. If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
5
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced 2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recre-
Not Met:
ational towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information. 1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue
to flash.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take
control switch back to the current position, wait five care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, (40 km/h).
refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer case,
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
located in this section.
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after drivetrain.
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
WARNING! WARNING!
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
TRAL position without first fully engaging the park-
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
ing brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disen-
injury or death.
gages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
driveline components. should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Shifting Procedure 2WD To 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK
NOTE: Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK can
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage
shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
tion will remain ON and the newly selected position
turning the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine 5
ments for the selected position have been met. To retry a
either running or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the
shift: return the control switch back to the original
ignition switch is in the ACC position.
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds and try the shift again. NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case between 2WD and 4WD AUTO/4WD LOCK if the front
position have been met, the current position indicator and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to com-
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain plete the shift.
ON. 2WD Or 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to NOTE:
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of • If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
the following procedures: Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
Preferred Procedure or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt
is in process, the desired position indicator light will
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph flash continuously while the original position indicator
(3 to 5 km/h). light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. • The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
3. While still rolling, rotate the 4WD control switch to the shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to
desired position. be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, then the shift will not take place and no
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case • Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
(Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped • Neutral (NEUTRAL)
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by For additional information on the appropriate use of each
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads. 5
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi-
mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case — Eight Speed
Transmission Only driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
positions:
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
NEUTRAL (N) NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in
the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by
using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing
only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy 4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate
benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD. the current and desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
will do the following:
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
pushing the desired position on the 4WD control switch.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for 3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
to flash. or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
position have been met. To retry the selection, push the
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To
(40 km/h). 5
find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙
for your transfer case, located in this section. Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
and that service is required. there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
WARNING!
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury or death.
Shifting Procedure
WARNING!
NOTE:
• You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the • If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging position have not been met, the transfer case will not
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
position disengages both the front and rear drive tion will remain ON and the newly selected position
shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK ments for the selected position have been met.
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking • If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
brake should always be applied when the driver is position have been met, the current position indicator
not in the vehicle. light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve- will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly ON.
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi- 2WD To 4WD LOCK
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle. Push the desired position on the 4WD control switch to
shift the transfercase. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK
can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With
the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator
pedal after selecting the desired position on the control
switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition must be in the
ON position with the engine either running or off. This 4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
ACC position.
Alternate Procedure
between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels
are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected 2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
position indicator light will flash and the original position engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed 5
3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control
and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
switch.
2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt
the following procedures: is in process, the desired position indicator light will
Preferred Procedure flash continuously while the original position indicator
light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
(3 to 5 km/h). • The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the position, then the shift will not take place and no
transfer case control switch. position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
Five-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case • Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
(Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped • Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by • Neutral (NEUTRAL)
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel. For additional information on the appropriate use of each
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
4WD AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends
power to the front wheels. The four–wheel drive system
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road con-
ditions.
4WD LOCK
Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case — Eight Speed
Transmission Only Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi-
This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
positions: rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
• Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD AUTO)

4WD LOW loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this
mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD
mode.
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
same speed. This range provides additional traction and LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
pushing the desired position on the 4WD Control Switch. 5
NEUTRAL (N)
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
“Starting And Operating” for further information. loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) or four-
wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by
as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD. using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing
be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive Operating” for further information.
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD, 4LOW, necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument cluster and position have been met. To retry the selection, push the
indicate the current and desired transfer case selection. current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To
When you select a different transfer case position, the find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙
indicator lights will do the following: for your transfer case, located in this section.
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF. engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the WARNING!
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
Not Met: illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
ON. injury or death.
to flash. or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
3. The transfer case will not shift. driveline components.
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take
care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h). • The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
drivetrain. vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
5
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit. Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
WARNING! • If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
• You or others could be injured or killed if you leave position have not been met, the transfer case will not
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging tion will remain ON and the newly selected position
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
position disengages both the front and rear drive ments for the selected position have been met.
shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle • If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK position have been met, the current position indicator
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
brake should always be applied when the driver is will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
not in the vehicle. When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
(Continued) ON.
2WD To 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
Push the desired position on the 4WD Control Switch to
the following procedures:
shift the transfer case. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD
AUTO and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle Preferred Procedure
stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the
transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momen-
(3 to 5 km/h).
tarily release the accelerator pedal after selecting the de-
sired position on the control switch. If the vehicle is 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the
with the engine either running or OFF. This shift cannot be
completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position. transfer case control switch.
between 2WD and 4WD AUTO/4WD LOCK if the front
and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this Alternate Procedure
situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and
the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this
time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to com- 2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
plete the shift. engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
2WD Or 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW 3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear switch.
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not 4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants. flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt
is in process, the desired position indicator light will
flash continuously while the original position indicator
light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a 5
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to
be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
Air Suspension Switch
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (1500 MODELS) — IF 1 — Up Button
EQUIPPED 2 — Down Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer selectable)
Description 4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer selectable)
5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer selectable)
The air suspension system provides full time load leveling 6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer selectable)
capability along with the benefit of being able to adjust
vehicle height by the push of a button. NOTE: The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode
when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph (100
km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds
or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard height will be automatically lowered to OR1. Off-Road 2
position of the suspension and is meant for normal may not be available due to vehicle payload, an instru-
driving. ment cluster message will be displayed when this oc-
curs. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under-
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately 1
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further
in [26 mm]) – This position should be the primary
information.
position for all off-road driving until Off Road 2 (OR2) is
needed. A smoother and more comfortable ride will
result. To enter OR1, push the “Up” button once from CAUTION!
the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below If the vehicle is in OFFROAD1 or OFFROAD2 setting,
35 mph (56 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if the be aware of your surroundings, you may not have the
vehicle speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h) and clearance required for certain areas and vehicle dam-
50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the age may occur.
vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle
will be automatically lowered to NRH. Off-Road 1 may • Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately .6 in [15
not be available due to vehicle payload, an instrument mm]) – This position provides improved aerodynamics
cluster message will be displayed when this occurs. by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understand- enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains be-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. tween 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for
greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately 2
66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH from
in [51 mm]) – This position is intended for off-roading
Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph
use only where maximum ground clearance is required.
(48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than 20
To enter OR2, push the “Up” button twice from the NRH
seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph
position or once from the OR1 position while vehicle
(48 km/h).
speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the
vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle
NOTE: Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through NOTE: Entry/Exit mode may be achieved using your key
vehicle settings in the instrument cluster display when fob for easier entry/loading. Refer to “A Word About Your
equipped with Uconnect 3.0, or your Uconnect Radio when Keys” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”
equipped with Uconnect 5.0, 8.4A, or 8.4AN. Refer to for further information.
Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Understand- CAUTION!
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your sur-
• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 2 roundings, you may not have the clearance required for 5
in [51 mm]) – This position lowers the vehicle for easier certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.
passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the
vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo. To enter
Entry/Exit Mode, push the “Down” button once from the The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN
NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph (53 km/h). position or the engine running for all user requested
Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) the changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors, must
vehicle height will begin to lower. If the vehicle speed be closed. If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle
remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph is lowering the change will not be completed until the open
(40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle speed door(s) is closed.
exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change will be This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which
cancelled. To return to Normal Height Mode, push the keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncom-
“Up” button once while in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle ing traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle
over 15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode may not be will move up first and then the front. When lowering the
available due to vehicle payload, an instrument cluster vehicle, the front will move down first and then the rear.
message will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the air Air Suspension Modes
suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a the system in unique situations:
proper appearance.
AERO Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension system has a
be disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in feature which will put the vehicle into AERO height
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor- automatically. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
mation. “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done through NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding running.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tire/Jack Mode
WARNING! To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension system

has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
The air suspension system uses a high pressure vol- disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under-
ume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal standing Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
injury or damage to the system, see your authorized “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with
dealer for service. a touch screen radio for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Transport Mode Protection Strategy
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle
air suspension system has a feature which will put the will disable load leveling as required (suspension over-
vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic loaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling will auto-
load leveling system. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis- matically resume as soon as system operation requirements
play” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or are met. See your authorized dealer if system does not
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument resume.
Panel” if equipped with a touch screen radio for further 5
NOTE: If towing with air suspension refer to “Trailer
information.
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine tion.
running.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instru-
enabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under- ment Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
standing Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in Panel” for further information.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
a touch screen radio for further information.
has been detected.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine See your authorized dealer for system service if normal
running. operation does not resume.
Operation The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the
current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps
will show a position which the system is working to
achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are
flashing, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the position
the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if
multiple indicators are flashing, the lowest solid indicator
lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
Pushing the “Up” button once will move the suspension
one position higher from the current position, assuming all
conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
running, speed below threshold, etc). The “Up” button can
be pushed multiple times, each push will raise the re-
quested level by one position up to a maximum position of
Air Suspension Switch OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current
conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
1 — Up Button
2 — Down Button Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move the suspen-
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer selectable) sion one position lower from the current level, assuming all
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer selectable) conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer selectable) running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc). The
6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer selectable)
“DOWN” button can be pushed multiple times, each push
will lower the requested level by one position down to a
minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest position
allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed,
etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle • Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-
speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the ve-
and instrument cluster display messages will operate the hicle.
same for automatic changes and user requested changes. • Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 3, 4, 5 and 6 will be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2. vehicle.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 3, 4 and 5 will be • Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1. 5
be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by
• Normal Ride Height (NRH)/Aero Mode – Indicator driving the vehicle.
lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (REBEL MODELS
this position. ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated
Description
when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode. Entry/Exit
mode can be requested up to 33 mph (53 km/h). If The air suspension system provides full time load leveling
vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph capability along with the benefit of being able to adjust
(24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will flash and indicator lamp vehicle height by the push of a button.
3 will remain solid until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at
which point indicator lamp 4 will turn off.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
driving.
• Off-Road (OR) (Raises the vehicle approximately 1 in
[26 mm]) – This position is intended for off-roading use
only where maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR, push the “Up” button once from the NRH
position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
While in OR, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
(40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automatically
lowered to NRH. Off-Road may not be available due to
vehicle payload, an instrument cluster display message
Air Suspension Switch will be shown when this occurs. Refer to “Instrument
1 — Up Button Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
2 — Down Button Panel” for further information.
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
4 — Aero Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
5 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
CAUTION!
6 — Off-Road Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
If the vehicle is in Off-Road setting, be aware of your
surroundings, you may not have the clearance required
NOTE: The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode for certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.
when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph
(100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20
seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).
• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately .6 in [15 • Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 3
mm]) – This position provides improved aerodynamics in [73 mm]) – This position lowers the vehicle for easier
by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the
enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains be- vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo. To enter
tween 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for Entry/Exit Mode, push the “Down” button twice from the
greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph (53 km/h).
66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH from Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) the
Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph vehicle height will begin to lower. If the vehicle speed 5
(48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than 20 remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph
seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle speed
(48 km/h). exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change will be
cancelled. To return to Normal Height Mode, push the
NOTE: Speed thresholds for raising the vehicle only apply
“Up” button twice while in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle
if Automatic Aero Mode is enabled.
over 15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode may not be
• To enter Aero Mode manually push the down button
available due to vehicle payload, an instrument cluster
once from NRH at any vehicle speed. To return to NRH
display message will be shown when this occurs. Refer to
push the up button once while vehicle speed is less than
56 mph (90 km/h).
NOTE: Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through
vehicle settings on your Uconnect Radio when equipped CAUTION!
with UConnect 5.0, 8.4A, or 8.4AN. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your sur-
further information. roundings, you may not have the clearance required for
certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.
The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/
position or the engine running for all user requested disabling of air suspension features must be done through
changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors, must the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
be closed. If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
is lowering the change will not be completed until the open
door(s) is closed. WARNING!
This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which The air suspension system uses a high pressure vol-
keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncom- ume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal
ing traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle injury or damage to the system, see your authorized
will move up first and then the front. When lowering the dealer for service.
vehicle, the front will move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the air Air Suspension Modes
suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a the system in unique situations:
proper appearance.
AERO Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension system has a
system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to
feature which will put the vehicle into AERO height
be disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
automatically. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
mation.
mation.
running.
Tire/Jack Mode Wheel Alignment Mode
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension system Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be
has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be enabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under-
disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under- standing Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
standing Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.
5
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
running. Protection Strategy
Transport Mode In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the will disable load leveling as required (suspension over-
air suspension system has a feature which will put the loaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling will auto-
vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic matically resume as soon as system operation requirements
load leveling system. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis- are met. See your authorized dealer if system does not
play” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or resume.
NOTE: If towing with air suspension refer to “Trailer
Panel” if equipped with a touch screen radio for further
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
information.
tion.
running.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move the suspen-
sion one position lower from the current level, assuming all
conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instru-
running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc). The
ment Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
“DOWN” button can be pushed multiple times, each push
will lower the requested level by one position down to a
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest position
has been detected. allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed,
Operation etc.)
The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps
will show a position which the system is working to and instrument cluster display messages will operate the
achieve. When raising or lowering, the flashing indicator same for automatic changes and user requested changes.
lamp is the position the system is working to achieve. • Off-Road (OR) – Indicator lamps 3, 4, 5 and 6 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR.
Pushing the “Up” button once will move the suspension
one position higher from the current position, assuming all • Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps 3, 4 and 5
conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine will be illuminated when the vehicle is in NRH.
running, speed below threshold, etc). The “Up” button can • Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated
be pushed multiple times, each push will raise the re- when the vehicle is in Aero Mode.
quested level by one position up to a maximum position of
OR or the highest position allowed based on current
conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated truck’s rear ride height level. There are two selectable
when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode. Entry/Exit heights that can be chosen based on your operating condi-
mode can be requested up to 33 mph (53 km/h). If tions.
vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN
(24 km/h) indicator lamp 3 will flash and indicator lamp position or the engine running with zero vehicle speed for
4 will remain solid until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at all user requested changes and load leveling.
which point indicator lamp 4 will turn off.
• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi- 5
nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the ve-
hicle.
• Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be
illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the
vehicle.
• Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3, 4 and 5 will
be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle.
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (2500/3500 MODELS) —

IF EQUIPPED Rear Leveling Ride Height Switch
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard position
Description of the suspension and is meant for normal driving. It will
This air suspension system is a rear leveling ride height automatically adjust to maintain the rear ride height as
system. The main purpose of this system is to maintain the conditions change.
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) – Lowers the vehicle Ignition OFF Behavior
approximately 1 in (25 mm) for a level truck, to be used as For a predetermined amount of time after the ignition is off
required while trailer towing. It will automatically adjust the air suspension may adjust to maintain a proper appear-
to maintain the rear ride height as conditions change. ance.
Trailer Decoupling/Unloading - The air suspension sys-
tem will load level (lower/exhaust only) for up to 10 WARNING!
minutes after the vehicle is turned off. This allows for easy
removal of a trailer and/or load from the back of the truck The air suspension system uses a high pressure vol-
by maintaining the ride height. After 10 minutes you will ume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal
need to turn the ignition to the run position for the air injury or damage to the system, see your authorized
suspension to maintain ride height. If the air suspension dealer for service.
system is disabled using the settings menu (Tire Jack Mode,
Air Suspension Modes
Transport Mode or Alignment Mode) the system will
remain disabled when the vehicle is turned off. Reactivat- The air suspension system has multiple modes to protect
ing the air suspension can be accomplished via the settings the system in unique situations:
menu or driving the vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h) for Tire Tire/Jack Mode
Jack Mode or Alignment Mode and 16 mph (26 km/h) for
Transport Mode. To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension system
has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
NOTE: disabled. This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
• Most 3500 models will not lower to Alternate Trailer running. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under-
Height (ATH) when unloaded. standing Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with
• Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine Protection Strategy
running. In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle
Transport Mode will disable load leveling as required (suspension over-
loaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling will auto-
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the
matically resume as soon as system operation requirements
air suspension system has a feature which will put the
are met. See your authorized dealer if system does not
vehicle below Normal Ride Height (NRH) and disable the
resume.
automatic load leveling system. This mode is intended to
5
be enabled with engine running. Refer to “Instrument Instrument Cluster Display Messages
Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instru-
Instrument Panel” if equipped with a touch screen radio
ment Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
running. has been detected.
Wheel Alignment Mode See your authorized dealer for system service if normal
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be operation does not resume.
enabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under-
Operation
standing Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) button once
a touch screen radio for further information. while at Normal Ride Height (NRH), will lower the vehicle
to Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) and will illuminate the
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine LED.
running.
NOTE: The LED will continuously blink until vehicle stuck. The locking front and rear differentials should only
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) has been achieved and the be engaged during low-speed, extreme off-road situations
LED will turn off. where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with the
ground. It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) again will raise
the differentials locked on pavement due to the reduced
the vehicle to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
ability to turn and speed limitations.
NOTE: The LED will continuously blink until Normal Ride
Height (NRH) has been achieved.
• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-
nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the ve-
hicle.
• Tire/Jack Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-
nated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
• Wheel Alignment Mode – No indicator lamps will be
illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle.
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON

Axle Lock Selector
MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front
and rear differentials. These differentials, when engaged,
mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the
wheels to spin at an equal rate. This allows the vehicle to
maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming
NOTE: Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK
CAUTION!
position, the limited slip differential in the rear axle still
• Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced provides torque biasing capability for moderate low trac-
roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced and tion environments.
damage to the drivetrain may occur when the axles During the command to lock the axle, the indicator light
are locked on hard surfaced roads. will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock command
• Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is stuck has been successfully executed, the light will remain on
and the tires are spinning. You can damage drivetrain solid. 5
components. Lock the rear axle before attempting
situations or navigating terrain, which could possi- To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4LO. Refer to
bly cause the vehicle to become stuck. “Four Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information. Move the axle locker switch
The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch. position to REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph
The switch has three positions: (5 km/h). The RR indicator light will remain on when the
rear axle is locked.
• AXLE UNLOCK – the front and rear axles are unlocked
NOTE: Left to right wheel speed difference may be neces-
• REAR LOCK – the rear axle is locked sary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicator light is
• FRONT/REAR LOCK – the front and rear axles are flashing after placing the switch in the REAR LOCK or
locked FRONT/REAR LOCK position, drive the vehicle in a turn
or on loose gravel to expedite the locking action.
Under normal driving conditions, the switch should be left
in the AXLE UNLOCK position.
To unlock the rear axle; move the axle locker switch to
WARNING!
AXLE UNLOCK. The REAR LOCK indicator light will go
Do not use the locked axle position for normal driving. out when the rear axle is unlocked.
A locked front axle is intended for off-road driving
only. Locking the front axle during on-road driving STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
will reduce the steering ability. This could cause a WAGON ONLY
collision and you may be seriously injured. Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting
stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front sus-
To lock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to pension travel in off-road situations.
FRONT/REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). The indicator light will be solid when the front Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has an
axle is locked. increased ride height of approximately 1.9 in (48.3 mm) in
the front and 1.5 in (38.1 mm) in the rear. A major
NOTE: The rear axle must be locked before the front axle advantage to increasing ride height is the positive effect it
will lock. has on approach/departure and break over angles.
To unlock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to This system is controlled by the electronic control sway bar
REAR LOCK. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light switch located on the instrument panel.
will go out when the axle is unlocked.
NOTE: The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side
to side loads on the axle. Driving slowly while turning the
steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right hand turn or
driving in REVERSE for a short distance may be required
to release the torque lock and unlock the axles.
enhances vehicle stability and assists in maintaining
control of the vehicle. The system monitors vehicle
speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar
at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a
flashing off road light and solid on road light. Once
vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the
system will attempt to return to the Off-Road mode. 5
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4HI or

4LO as shown in “Four Wheel Drive Operation” and push
the right hand Off Road stabilizer/sway bar button to
Sway Bar Disconnect Buttons obtain the Off-Road position. The amber indicator light
The switch has two positions; On-Road and Off-Road. The will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully
system is normally in the On-Road mode, indicated by a disconnected.
solid green light. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in
the On-Road mode during normal driving conditions. NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due
to left and right suspension height differences. This condi-
WARNING! tion is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading.
In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar must be
surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h), aligned. This alignment may require that the vehicle be
you may lose control of the vehicle, which could result driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side.
in serious injury or death. The front stabilizer bar
(Continued)
To return to the On-Road mode; push the left hand On The National Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management,
Road stabilizer/sway bar button. or local Department of Natural Resources are a wealth of
information and usually have maps with marked trails.
WARNING! Skid Plates And Underbody Protection
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to On-Road Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components of
mode, vehicle stability is reduced. Do not attempt to the truck including the fuel tank, transfer case and steering
drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster damper. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with boxed
than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss of control of the cross members and fore/aft rails. This additional protec-
vehicle, which could result in serious injury or death. tion allows the vehicle to be utilized in severe off-road
Contact your local service center for assistance. situations that would be considered impassable by a nor-
mal truck.
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON
ONLY Ramp Travel Index (RTI)
Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics The ramp travel index is the distance, in inches, that you
can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree ramp
Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road capabilities. without lifting any other wheel off the ground. This
These off-road capabilities will allow you to explore those distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the
wilderness trails where few travel, providing a source of vehicle and multiplied by 1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle has
exciting and satisfying recreation. Before you venture out, an RTI of 510, which means you can articulate one front
you should contact your local governmental agency to wheel 26 inches (66 cm) in the air while the other three
determine the designated off-road vehicle (ORV) trails or wheels remain in contact with the ground.
recreation areas. You should always tread lightly and only
use established roads, trails or ORV recreational areas.
Water Fording Characteristics The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle’s ability to cross You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road.
a body of still water, where the powertrain and drivetrain You should be familiar with the terrain and area before
are safe from water ingestion. This vehicle has high water proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions:
fording characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
water, without stopping, 24 inches (60 cm) deep at a and ice. Every surface has a different effect on your
maximum speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of water vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your
30 inches (76 cm) deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so 5
(8 km/h), both with an entrance ramp angle of 1.3 degrees. always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain
a good driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns
CAUTION! or braking. In most cases there are no road signs, posted
speed limits or signal lights. Therefore you will need to use
The door sill height is 25 inches (63.5 cm). Water may your own good judgment on what is safe and what isn’t.
intrude into the interior of the vehicle at greater When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for
depths. surface obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan
your future driving route while remembering what you are
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
currently driving over.
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous
use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving). When CAUTION!
climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light
brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other com-
jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you bustible materials. The heat from your vehicle exhaust
need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline. system could cause a fire.
• Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control and
WARNING!
traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo. gear and shift the transfer case to 4LO (Low Range) if
Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-road necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to
situation. maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a
When To Use Low Range stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a ¼
When driving off-road, shift into 4LO (Low Range) for turn quickly back and forth, while still applying throttle.
additional traction or to improve handling and control on This will allow the tires to get a fresh ⬙bite⬙ and help
slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the lower gearing, low maintain your momentum.
range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power
range. This will allow you to idle over obstacles and down CAUTION!
hills, with improved control and less effort. Also, use 4LO On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
(Low Range) in rain, ice, snow, mud, sand, to get heavy engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine brak-
loads rolling, improve traction, or whenever 4HI (High ing may cause skidding and loss of control.
Range) traction will not do the job.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand • Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around
the tires and is very difficult to get through. You should
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in use 4LO (Low Range) with a gear low enough to maintain
snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to your momentum without shifting. If you start to slow to a
steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a ¼
should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances turn quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud
and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and
slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the getting stuck. They are normally full of debris from
vehicle’s momentum. previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before
entering any mud hole, get out and determine how deep Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points)
it is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can While driving off road, you will encounter many types of
be safely recovered if stuck. terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types
• Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path ahead to
full tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail determine the correct approach and your ability to safely
maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a
key to driving in soft sand using the appropriate tire firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it 5
and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are makes contact with the object. Apply the throttle lightly
going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes, while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle
reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) up and over the object.
to allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire
WARNING!
pressure will drastically improve your traction and han-
dling, while driving on the soft sand, but you must return Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pave- loading which could cause you to loose control of your
ment or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air vehicle.
the tires back up prior to reducing the pressure.
Using A Spotter
CAUTION! There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and determine the correct path. Determining the correct path can
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire be extremely difficult when you are confronting many ob-
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your stacles. In these cases have someone guide you over, through,
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. or around the obstacle. Have the person stand a safe distance
in front of you where they can see the obstacle, watch your
tires and undercarriage, and guide you through.
Crossing Large Rocks angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed dirt to fill
the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You should
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which en-
now be able to drive out following the trench you just
sures you drive over the largest with your tires. This will
created at a 45-degree angle.
lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of the
tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is
designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and make WARNING!
every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires. There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an
obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
CAUTION!
Crossing Logs
• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough
to strike your axles or undercarriage. To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately
• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top of
enough to contact the door sills. the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While
climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut, ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehi-
cle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-degree CAUTION!
angle and let each tire go through the obstacle indepen- Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
dently. You need to use caution when crossing large than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any become high centered.
large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to
put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in a
rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45-degree
Getting High Centered • Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a hill
consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is too
If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out of
steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill side
the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung
trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on top
up on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is the
and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches or
best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what
other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover the
you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few
vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything looks
rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point
good and you feel confident, then change transmission
when you let the vehicle down. You can also try rocking the 5
into a lower gear, shift the transfer case into 4LO (Low)
vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.
and proceed with caution. You should use first gear and
4LO (Low Range) for very steep hills.
CAUTION!
• Driving Up Hill – Once you have determined your
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects in- ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate
creases the risk of underbody damage. gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run.
Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply
Hill Climbing
more power as you start up the hill. Do not race forward
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under- into a steep grade, the abrupt change of grade could
standing of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations. cause you to lose control. If the front end begins to
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires
climb and should not be attempted. You should always feel back on the ground. As you approach the crest of the hill
confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You should ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top. If
always climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill,
climb a hill on an angle. ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turn-
ing the steering wheel no more than a ¼ turn quickly
back and forth. This will provide a fresh ⬙bite⬙ into the
surface and will usually provide enough traction to
WARNING!
complete the climb. If you do not make it to the top,
place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
brakes. Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured or killed.
WARNING!
• Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible avoid
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your
on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an incline places more
the risk of a roll over, which may result in severe injury weight on the down hill wheels, which increases the
or death. possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover. Make sure
the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils.
• Driving Down Hill – Before driving down a steep hill
If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading
you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent.
slightly up or down.
What is the surface traction? Is the grade too steep to
maintain a slow controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is
WARNING!
it a straight descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base
of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends too fast? Driving across an incline increases the risk of a roll-
If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make over, which may result in severe injury.
sure you are in 4LO (Low Range) with the transmission in
first gear (manually select first gear on automatic trans- • If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall or
missions) and proceed with caution. Allow engine braking begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill, allow
to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary, your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply
but do not allow the tires to lock. the brake. Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE.
Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression
braking of the engine and transmission to help regulate deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air
your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle intake. If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it.
speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding Determine if it has ingested water first. The key to any
the tires. crossing is low and slow. You want to use first gear in 4L
(Low Range) and proceed very slowly with a constant slow
WARNING! speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h] maximum) and light throttle.
Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot the crossing. After crossing any water higher than the
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt 5
bottom of the axle differentials, you should inspect all of
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.
rolling the vehicle, which may result in severe injury.
Always back carefully straight down a hill in RE- CAUTION!
VERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using
only the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally across Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
a hill, always drive straight up or down. case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or other ve-
Driving Through Water hicle components and your brakes will be less effec-
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water. tive once wet and/or muddy.
Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be
• Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you ap-
attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible manner.
proach any type of water you need to determine if you
You should only drive through areas which are designated
can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out
and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage
and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You
to the environment. You should know your vehicle’s
need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and
abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong.
bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters,
You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing
check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be • Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other
intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the Flowing Water – Flowing water can be extremely dan-
vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the gerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or
water depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft river even in shallow water. Fast moving water can
bottoms the vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of
the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this control. Even in very shallow water, a high current can
when determining the depth and the ability to safely still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting
cross. you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high
• Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower
Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded or other water currents in depths greater than the vehicle’s
standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy running ground clearance. You should never attempt to
waters. These water types normally contain hidden cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle’s
obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate running ground clearance. Even the slowest current can
water depth, approach angle, and bottom condition. push the heaviest vehicle downstream out of control if
Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to the water is deep enough to push on the large surface
hook up tow straps prior to entering. This makes for a area of the vehicle’s body. Before you proceed determine
faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If you are able the speed of the current, the water’s depth, approach
to determine you can safely cross, than proceed using angle, bottom condition and if there are any obstacles,
the low and slow method. then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using
the low and slow technique.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effective-
ness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire damage
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air
control. This could put you and your passengers at risk pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at
of injury or drowning. a reduced tire pressure, drive at slower speeds and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
5
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving Vehicle Recovery
Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation where
ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle recovery
pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its should always be given consideration before attempting a
surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or form questionable obstacle. You should never go off-road driv-
to the ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and vehicles ing without the ability to recover your vehicle from a
require different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like rock and situation. Having another vehicle with you usually works
heavier vehicles require higher pressures than softer sur- best for most situations. The first thing to do is assess the
faces such as sand and lighter vehicles. You will need to situation. Why are you stuck? Are you hung up on
experiment to determine what is right for your situation. It something? Would it be easier to go forward or to go
is easier and faster to let air out than it is to replace it so, backward? Can you still move the vehicle? Is there an
start high and lower it as required. Remember you must anchor point to winch to? Are you alone or do you have
return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on another vehicle to help? Is there high risk of vehicle
road or at highway conditions. Be sure you have a way to damage during the recovery process? Answering these
return the tires to their normal on road air pressure. questions will help you determine the best method of
recovery. If you can still move the vehicle slightly and the
only issue is slick ground, then rock cycling your vehicle
would be the first choice. If you have ample room, an the debris from the tread and improve the traction. You
additional vehicle and there is low risk of vehicle impinge- want to create a rocking motion with the vehicle. This
ment on the surroundings, then using a tow strap to the helps build vehicle momentum, which hopefully gets
vehicle tow hooks would be fast and easy. If the vehicle is you out. Remember to ease off and on the accelerator
severely hung up or in a situation where great care needs before and after the shift. If after a few rock cycles your
to be taken during the recovery, then nothing can do the job vehicle is not free, stop and try another method of
better than a winch. If you are severely hung up on recovery. Continuous rock cycling will only cause un-
something you should jack the vehicle up and stack necessary damage to your vehicle and the environment.
something under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll off
the object without causing further damage. This should be CAUTION!
tried before attempting any recovery method.
Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an
CAUTION! excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires faster than
an indicated 30 mph (48 km/h).
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first clear-
ing the object, may result in additional underbody • Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap – Tow straps
damage. are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from
minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle which
• Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your vehicle is not stuck. The tow hooks on your vehicle are designed
is one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly used to take the abusive force generated during vehicle
methods. This simply involves shifting your vehicle recovery. Do not use the bumper or any other vehicle
from DRIVE to REVERSE, while applying throttle after component as an attachment point. Using tow straps
each shift. During this process, for additional traction, requires coordination between the two drivers. Good
try turning your steering wheel quickly left and right no communication and line of sight are required for a safe
more than a ¼ turn. If you are stuck in mud, sand, or recovery. First connect the tow strap to the correct
snow try spinning your tires during this process to clean attachment points on both vehicles. There should be a
least 20 to 30 feet (6 to 9 meters) between the vehicles to
WARNING!
allow for a safe recovery. If necessary join two tow straps
together using a 1 ½ inch hard wood dowel. This will Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two straps
with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects could
keep the straps from becoming knotted and is safer than
become projectiles if a strap breaks, which could cause
using a clevis pin if the strap breaks. Next have the tow
severe injury. Never leave more than 2 to 3 feet (.6 to 1
vehicle backup, leaving two to three feet worth of slack
meter) of slack in the strap. More slack than this
in the strap. Then the tow vehicle, using light throttle,
greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle damage.
should accelerate tightening the strap providing the 5
Always keep everyone at least 30 feet (9 meters) away
pulling force needed to free the vehicle. The vehicle
from a strapping or winching situation.
being recovered should assist in the recovery, at the time
of the snap, by slowly spinning the tires in the same • Winching (Refer To “Winch Operation” For Additional
direction as the pulling vehicle. After the vehicle be- Information) – Winching is most commonly used in the
comes free, the driver of the previously stuck vehicle following situations: there is no support vehicle avail-
should signal they are free and should hit their brakes able, a high controlled force is required to recover the
stopping both vehicles. The driver of the pulling vehicle vehicle, there is a high risk of environmental or vehicle
should let off the throttle without using the brakes, once damage, or where nothing else seems to work. A winch
signaled by the other driver. This sequence is important can deliver a high pulling force with a great deal of
to avoid having the recovered vehicle hit the pulling control. It allows you to walk the vehicle out of the
vehicle. situation in a slow controlled manner. This control
works well for avoiding further vehicle damage. Once
you decide it is time to use the winch look for a good
anchor point. It needs to be strong enough to hold more
than the vehicle’s weight and provide a direction of pull
as straight as possible. Use block and tackle if necessary
to improve the angle of pull or increase the winch’s
pulling force. If the anchor point is a tree use a strap
around its base and hook the cable to the strap. If it is After Driving Off-Road
another vehicle, then place that vehicle in PARK and
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
block the front tires. If you cannot find an anchor point
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
within reach try using your spare tire by burying it.
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can
Once you have determined an anchor point hook up the
get any problems taken care of right away and have your
cable, ensuring there are a least five wraps of cable left
on the drum, and place a floor mat or something else vehicle ready when you need it.
over the strung out cable. Placing something over the • Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
strung out cable helps keep the cable on the ground if it Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
breaks. Next, place the vehicle in first gear and apply a exhaust system for damage.
very light throttle as you power the winch in. Be careful
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
not to allow slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle.
required.
Do not try to guide the cable into the drum. If it starts to
bunch up on one end, let it. You can re-spool the cable • Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
afterwards. Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
always stand back while winching. pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
WARNING!
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
Winch cables are under high tension when in use and could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
can become a projectile if they fail. Never stand over or lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
straddle the winch cable. Never jerk or overload the • After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
winch cable. Never stand in front of the vehicle while dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
winching. Failure to follow these instructions can wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
result in serious or fatal injury. cleaned as soon as possible.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during
WARNING!
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator will
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might supply maximum traction. When starting with only one
not have full braking power when you need it to rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight mo-
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your mentary application of the parking brake may be necessary
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked to gain maximum traction.
and cleaned as necessary. 5
WARNING!
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear
situation. wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose control
of the vehicle.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction on
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could cause
snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when there is
both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide
a difference between the traction characteristics of the
sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.
surface under the right and left rear wheels. During normal
driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs simi-
larly to a conventional differential. On slippery surfaces,
however, the differential delivers more of the driving effort
to the rear wheel having the better traction.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES • Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
Acceleration
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to • Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a visible.
difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
• Keep tires properly inflated.
wheels.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
WARNING! the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Differ-
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and ential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care- amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, handling.
snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Traction Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road vent damage to your vehicle.
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions
should be observed:
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING! • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and pedal several times to dry the brakes.
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further- • Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve- ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, 5
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may and others around you.
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you. CAUTION!
Shallow Standing Water • Always check the depth of the standing water before
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal- driving through it. Never drive through standing
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
Warnings before doing so. mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
WARNING! is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
when driving through standing water.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago-
• Driving through standing water may cause damage nally across the hill.
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis- When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain, shift
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator slowly
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving to avoid spinning the wheels.
through standing water. Do not continue to operate Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not After Driving Off-Road
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by get any problems taken care of right away and have your
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills exhaust system for damage.
or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill,
required.
choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and • Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
cautiously. the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY (IF
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel EQUIPPED)
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
Things To Know Before Using Your Winch
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, General Winch Information
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery
cleaned as soon as possible. winch. This winch uses the electrical power from the
vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds wire 5
WARNING! rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduction. By
nature, a winch is capable of generating very high forces
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause and should be used with care. Do not operate the winch
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might without reading and understanding the complete winch
not have full braking power when you need it to owner’s manual.
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked Tensioning The Wire Rope
and cleaned as necessary. The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use.
Follow the instructions below to tension the rope:
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for 1. Un-spool the wire rope leaving five wraps of rope on the
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel winch drum.
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the
2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.
situation.
Low Voltage Interrupt
CAUTION!
Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load required winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage
to tension the wire rope. drops to a low level. The winch will not power-in or out for
30 seconds if this device is tripped. If the interrupt is
3. Apply at least 500 lbs (227 kg) of tension to the rope
tripped, the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a
while winding the rope. Always use care to ensure the
few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to
rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is
recover before continuing to winch.
neatly wound onto the drum.
Winch Motor Thermal Protection
CAUTION! Your winch is equipped with a thermal protection device in
Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in the the motor. If the winch is operated for an excessive
direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the duration, the device may interrupt motor function to
winch. protect the winch motor. During this time the winch will
power-out but will not power-in. Allow the winch motor to
cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch. The
winch will resume normal function once the motor cools.
Understanding The Features Of Your Winch
Winch Components
1. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle 2. Remote Socket: The remote socket allows the remote
charging system and features a thermal protection control to be attached to the control pack to allow the
switch that automatically stops motor function in the winch to function.
power-in direction if the motor gets too hot.
3. Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch drum Fairlead: The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope and
allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and minimizes damage to the rope.
transmits force to the wire rope. The winch is equipped
Winch Accessories
with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the
winch drum if the winch motor is stopped. The following accessories are necessary to attach the winch
to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe winching.
4. 3-Stage Planetary Gear Set: Provides balance between
speed and pulling power.
Gloves: Wire rope, through use,
5. Wire Rope: The wire rope allows the winch to be
will develop ⬙barbs⬙ which can
connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force.
slice skin. It is extremely impor-
6. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch drum to tant to wear protective gloves
be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the wire while operating the winch or
rope to be pulled from the winch by hand. handling the wire rope. Avoid
7. Remote Control: The remote control provides the inter- loose fitting clothes or anything
face between the winch operator and the winch. The that could become entangled in
remote control provides the ability to power the winch the wire rope and other moving
in, out, and stop the winch. To operate the winch, the parts.
toggle switch is pressed down to power the winch in
and up to power the winch out. The winch will stop if
the switch is left in the neutral (center) position.
CAUTION!
If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the
hook.
Snatch/Block Pulley: Used Tree Trunk Protector: Typically

properly, the multi-purpose made of tough, high-quality ny-
snatch block allows you to (1) lon, it provides the operator an
increase the winch’s pulling attachment point for the winch
power; and (2) change your rope to a wide variety of anchor
pulling direction without dam- points and objects, as well as
aging the wire rope. Proper use protect living trees. 5
of the snatch block is covered in
⬙Before You Pull.⬙
Clevis/D-Shackles: The Operating Your Winch
D-Shackle is a safe means of
connecting the looped ends of WARNING!
cables, straps and snatch
blocks. The shackle’s pin is Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding
threaded to allow easy removal. proper winch usage may result in severe injury.
• Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook
when spooling wire rope in or out.
• Never use as a hoist.
• Never use to move persons.
• Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capacity.
• Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling
the wire rope.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Never touch wire rope or hook while in tension or • Never winch when there are less than five wraps of
under load. wire rope around the winch drum.
• Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is under • Always pass remote control through a window to
load, wire rope is in tension, or wire rope drum is avoid pinching lead in door, when using remote
moving. inside a vehicle.
• Always stand clear of wire rope and load and keep • Never leave the remote control plugged into the
others away during winching. winch while free spooling, rigging or sitting idle.
• Always keep hands and clothing clear of the wire
rope, hook and fairlead opening during operation General Information
and when spooling. Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some key
• Never wrap wire rope back onto itself. Always use a points to remember when using your winch are:
choker chain, wire choker rope or tree trunk protec-
tor on the anchor. • Always take your time to assess the situation and plan
• Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to your pull carefully.
increase the length of a pull. • Always take your time when using a winch.
• Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery
strap attached directly to the winch hook. • Use the right equipment for the situation.
• Never use ⴖbungeeⴖ straps that develop tremendous • Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire
and potentially dangerous amounts of force when rope to slip through your hands when handling the rope.
stretched.
• Always disconnect the remote control when not in • Only the operator should handle the wire rope and
use. remote control.
• Think safety at all times.
(Continued)
Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch 1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and wire rope for
damage. Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or
CAUTION! rope shows excessive wear or damage.
• Always Know Your Winch: Take the time to fully

read and understand the included Installation and
Operations Guide, and Basic Guide to Winching
Techniques, in order to understand your winch and
the winching operation. 5
• Always inspect winch installation and wire rope
condition before operating the winch. Frayed,
kinked or damaged wire rope must be replaced
immediately. Loose or damaged winch installation
must be corrected immediately.
• Always be sure any element which can interfere with
safe winching operations is removed prior to initiat-
ing winching. Winch Rope
• Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum,
wire rope and rigging.
• Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed wires, or loose
connections. Replace if damaged.
• Be careful not to pull the Winch Cable Collar
through the rollers. Watch and listen to Winch for
proper snugness.
2. Put on gloves. 4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap. Free the
winch hook from its anchor point. Attach the hook strap
3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the winch
to the hook (if not attached).
drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to disengage.
Freespooling conserves battery power.
Hook Strap
Free Spool
5. Pull the wire to the anchor point. Pull out enough wire
rope to reach your anchor point. Be sure to keep a
certain amount of tension on the wire as it can become
twisted and over-wrapped when slackened, leading to
wire rope damage. To prevent losing the end, hold the
hook strap while you work.
Tree Trunk Protector
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will withstand
the load.
Pulling Wire Rope

6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have established
your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk protector or
choker-chain around the object.
NOTE: How to choose an anchor point: A secure anchor
is critical to winching operations. An anchor must be
strong enough to hold while winching. Natural anchors
include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as low as
possible. If no natural anchors are available when recover-
ing another vehicle, your vehicle becomes the anchor point.
In this case, be sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL,
apply the hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your
vehicle from moving. Ideally, you’ll want an anchor point
that will enable you to pull straight in the direction the
vehicle will move. This allows the wire rope to wind tightly
and evenly onto the spooling drum. An anchor point as far
away as possible will provide the winch with its greatest Clevis/D-Shackles
pulling power. 8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating the
7. Attach the Clevis/D-shackle and Tree Trunk Protector. clutch lever on the winch to engage.
Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain NOTE: Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or
and through the hook loop, being careful not to over disengaged.
tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
9. Connect the remote control to the winch control box, 10. Put wire rope under tension. Using the remote control
located behind the front bumper. Be careful not to let the switch, slowly wind the wire rope until no slack
remote control cord dangle in front of the winch. If you remains. Once the wire rope is under tension, stand
choose to control the winch from inside your vehicle, well clear of it and never step over it.
always pass the remote through a window to avoid
pinching the cord in the door. Always disconnect the
remote control when not in use.
5
Pulling Wire Rope Under Tension

11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are
secured and free of debris before continuing with the
Winch Box Remote Control Connector winching procedure.
12. Check wire rope. The wire rope should be neatly
wound around the spooling drum. Improper winding
can cause damage to the wire rope.
or remove the blanket, slack the tension on the wire rope
first.
13. Establish ⴖno peopleⴖ zones: Make your intentions
clear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity
surrounding the winching operation is completely
aware of your intentions before you pull. Declare
where the spectators should not stand - never behind
or in front of the vehicle and never near the wire rope
or snatch block. Your situation may have other ⴖno
peopleⴖ zones.
Wire Neatly Wound Around The Spooling Drum

In certain situations you may
decide to throw a heavy blanket
or similar object over the wire
rope. A heavy blanket can ab-
sorb energy should the wire
rope break. Place it on the wire
rope midway between the
winch and the anchor point. Do
this before the wire rope is put
under tension. Do not approach
No People Zones
or move the blanket once tension is applied. Do not allow
it to get pulled into the fairlead. If it is necessary to move
14. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine on NOTE:
and light tension already on the wire rope, begin • Avoid overheating the winch motor. For extended
winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the wire winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow the
rope is winding evenly and tightly around the spooling winch motor to cool down.
drum. For additional assistance, the winched vehicle
can be slowly driven while being pulled by the winch. • What to look for under load: The wire rope must
Continue pulling until the vehicle is on stable ground. always spool onto the drum as indicated by the drum
If you are able to drive the vehicle, the winching rotation decal on the winch. As you power-in, make
sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on the 5
operation is complete.
drum. This prevents the outer wire wraps from draw-
ing into the inner wraps, binding and damaging the
wire rope. Avoid shock loads by using the control
switch intermittently to take up wire rope slack. Shock
loads can momentarily far exceed the winch and wire
rope ratings. During side pulls the wire rope tends to
stack up at one end of the drum. This stack can become
large enough to cause serious damage to the winch. So,
line up pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop
winching if the wire rope comes close to the tie rods or
mounting plate. To fix an uneven stack, spool out that
section of the rope and reposition it to the opposite end
of the drum, which will free up space for continued
Using The Remote Control
winching.
15. Secure vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle is com-
WARNING!
plete, be sure to secure the vehicle’s brakes and shift
the transmission to PARK. Release tension in the wire To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers
rope. inside the hook area as you are powering-in.
16. Disconnect the wire rope, and disconnect from the NOTE: How to spool under no load: Arrange the remote
anchor. control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch. Arrange
17. Rewind the wire rope. The person handling the wire the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when spooled. Be
rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide sure any wire rope already on the spooling drum is wound
through the hand, control the winch at all times. tightly and evenly layered. Tighten and straighten the layer
if necessary. Keep the wire rope under light tension and
spool the wire rope back and onto the winch drum in even
layers. Stop frequently to tighten and straighten the layers
as necessary. Repeat this process until the winch hook is the
same distance as the full length of the remote control from
the winch. Pinch the hook between your thumb and
forefinger and attach the hook strap. Hold the hook strap
between the thumb and forefinger to keep tension on the
wire rope. Walk the wire rope towards the fairlead, care-
fully spooling in the remaining wire rope. By pulsing the
remote control switch.
18. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow
Rewinding The Wire Rope hook.
simply increasing pulling power, or maintaining a straight-
line pulling situation. You will have to assess what technique
is correct for your situation. Think ⬙safety⬙ at all times.
How To Change The Pulling Direction
Hook In Stored Position

19. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the remote
control cord from the control box and store in a clean
and dry place. Winching operations are now complete.
Put the cap on the solenoid plug-in.
Change Pulling Directions
NOTE: Always store the remote control in a protected,
All winching operations should have a straight line from
clean, dry area.
the winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes the
Rigging Techniques wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting
Various winching situations will require application of other pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope. A snatch block,
winching techniques. These could range from too little dis- secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle will enable
tance to achieve maximum pull using straight line rigging,
you to change your pulling direction while still allowing Because pulling power decreases with the number of layers
the wire rope to be at 90° to wind properly onto the of wire rope on the winch drum, you can use a snatch block
spooling drum. to double line out more wire rope. This decreases the
number of layers of wire rope on the drum, and increases
Increasing Pulling Power
pulling power. Start by feeding out enough wire rope to
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more pulling free the winch hook. Attach the hook to your vehicle’s
power. The use of snatch blocks increases mechanical frame/tow hook and run the wire rope through a snatch
advantage and that increases your pulling power. block. Disengage the clutch and, using the snatch block,
Double Line pull out enough wire to reach your anchor point. Do not
attach the hook to the mounting kit. Secure to the anchor
point with a tree trunk protector or choker chain. Attach
the clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the two ends of
the strap/chain, being careful not to over tighten (tighten
and back-off 1/2 turn).
POWER STEERING
Electric Power Steering — 1500 Models
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it
Wire Rope Routing from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer
the vehicle manually.
If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle NOTE:
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the • Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
vehicle has lost power steering assistance. operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEER- these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
instrument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme steer- parking maneuvers.
ing maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
temperature condition in the power steering system. Once service. 5
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle
idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off. Hydraulic Power Steering — 2500/3500 Models
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding The standard power steering system will give you good
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering
STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is displayed the in- capability if power assist is lost.
strument cluster screen, they indicate the vehicle needs to If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to “Instrument still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
Panel” for further information. effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
there is a problem with the power steering system. system as the chemicals can damage your power steer-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in WARNING!
any way damage the steering system. Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
CAUTION! parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering steering fluid.
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
occur.
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts”
Power Steering Fluid Check — 2500/3500 Models in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service

interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked
if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent,
and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coor-
dinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
5
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the trans- Parking Brake Release
mission in PARK. When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park will illuminate.
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the NOTE:
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission
is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it a collision.
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
parking brake should always be applied whenever the your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
driver is not in the vehicle. injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
WARNING! and cause damage or injury.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully CAUTION!
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage. If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of thorized dealer immediately.
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. BRAKE SYSTEM
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in If power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated
a location accessible to children, and do not leave a brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the function. However, you will experience a substantial in-
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power crease in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
braking capability, the remaining system will still function systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be and control in various driving conditions.
evident by increased pedal travel during application,
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation
Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
of the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning
Light” (if equipped) during brake use. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Hydraulic Brake Assist — 2500/3500 Models Only This function manages the distribution of the braking 5
(Except Power Wagon) torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro-
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
system. You may experience some clicking or hissing
noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking Brake System Warning Light
conditions. The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches stay on for as long as four seconds.
operating temperature. If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re-
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec- on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake have the light repaired as soon as possible.
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak- • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking. by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and of such equipment should be performed by qualified
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight professionals.
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa- • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
tion(s). from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short traction afforded.
time after the stop). • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves. resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• Brake pedal pulsations. • The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop. never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica- optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
tion may result in degraded ABS performance. braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
may stay on for as long as four seconds. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
5
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock deactivated.
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys- WARNING!
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
Warning Light” is not on. natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warn- those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
ing Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
turned to the ON position, have the light repaired as soon bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
as possible. exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
Brake Assist System (BAS)
others.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
WARNING!
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
down the hill as normal. responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
activate: all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
• The feature must be enabled. required while driving to maintain safe control of your
• The vehicle must be stopped. vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
• Park brake must be off. a collision or serious personal injury.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
Towing With HSA Disabling And Enabling HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
towing a trailer. current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster display,
WARNING! refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated • If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument 5
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the Panel” for further information.
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum- display, perform the following steps:
ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releas-
straight forward).
ing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the 2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Also, 3. Apply the parking brake.
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
4. Start the engine.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide 5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause turn to the left.
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
bank below the climate control four times within twenty
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right. This system enhances directional control and stability of
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink sev- ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
eral times to confirm HSA is disabled. counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to maintain the desired path.
its previous setting.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
Traction Control System (TCS) path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and condition.
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and appropriate for the steering wheel position.
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This appropriate for the steering wheel position.
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
and ESC are in a reduced mode. ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road • Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
conditions. tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
WARNING! the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly 5
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in- vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro- increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting rollover, personal injury and death.
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, ESC Operating Modes
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa- NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of ESC On
others. This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
(Continued) This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This Full Off – If Equipped
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the “ESC
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illumi-
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
nate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for
Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will turn off.
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Mul- Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
tiple momentary button pushed may be required to return message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
to ESC On. on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
WARNING! NOTE: System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes (if
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction equipped).
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
(Continued)
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC
WARNING!
OFF Indicator Light
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. There- The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
fore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive ma- when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
neuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in position. It should go out with the engine run-
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is in- ning. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” 5
tended for off-highway or off-road use only. comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal-
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle function has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer- remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
off-road use.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre- The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
accidents, including those resulting from excessive when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions. up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE: evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
each time the ignition switch is turned ON. NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
be ON even if it was turned off previously. (ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop WARNING!
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation. Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
safety of others.
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always HDC has three states:
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Tow-
ing” in this section for further information. 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
with brake or throttle application).
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling ve-
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from hicle speed). 5
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
Enabling HDC
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
WARNING! following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer • Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
load to eliminate trailer sway. • Parking brake is released.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped • Driver door is closed.
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
Activating HDC • 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if NOTE: During HDC, the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed target speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by
for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by the transmission. When actively controlling HDC, the
using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected
HDC set speeds: set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
HDC Target Set Speeds Driver Override
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
activate brake application at anytime.
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) Deactivating HDC
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) following conditions occur:
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) • Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h) below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h) • Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude,
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h) is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h) • Vehicle is shifted to park.
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
Disabling HDC • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range. excess speed.
• The parking brake is applied. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
5
• Driver door opens. deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for cooled sufficiently.
greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) WARNING!
(HDC exits immediately).
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature. vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
Feedback To The Driver remain attentive to the driving conditions and is re-
sponsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about
the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for HDC.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE:
Tire Markings • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety 4 — Maximum Load
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
Standards Code (TIN)
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
and Temperature Grades preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
5
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of 5
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the 5
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
WARNING!
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) cause collisions.
(Continued)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result
in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure. This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”, passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Own- (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and 5
er’s Information kit. passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
“Starting And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supple- passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
ment located in your Owner’s Information kit, for further cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer tow- (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
ing.
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or capacity calculated in Step 4.
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
weight referenced here. this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and You could lose control of your vehicle.
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
are affected by improper tire pressure: the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Safety and Vehicle Stability • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
• Economy mended cold tire inflation pressure.
• Tread Wear Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
• Ride Comfort of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Safety
NOTE:
WARNING! • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can erratic and unpredictable steering response.
cause collisions. • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result vehicle to drift left or right.
in overheating and tire failure.
Fuel Economy
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
damage that result in tire failure. resulting in higher fuel consumption.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle Tread Wear
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control. Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
(Continued) for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
Tire Inflation Pressures (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door. inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
At least once a month: Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range 5
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality perature changes.
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
may look properly inflated even when they are under- 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
inflated. when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
CAUTION! outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture temperature condition.
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
damage the valve stem.
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- WARNING!
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor- your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading The instability could cause a collision. Always use
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures. Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
WARNING! the following criteria:
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum • The tire has not been driven on when flat.
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). • The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
WARNING!
All Season Tires — If Equipped
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary be- death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be possibility of loss of vehicle control.
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure Snow Tires
5
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
your vehicle. during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi- If you need snow tires, select tires
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. equivalent in size and type to the origi-
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving in sets of four; failure to do so may
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am- adversely affect the safety and handling
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are of your vehicle.
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
authorized dealer.
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to original
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and Spare Tires — If Equipped
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service Kit” section
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
located in your Owner’s Information kit for further infor-
using these tire types.
mation.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles CAUTION!
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Damage to the vehicle may result.
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. Wheel — If Equipped
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
capacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
mode. tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa- vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
tion. your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
WARNING!
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, 5
103M. which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
your vehicle at the first opportunity. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
on the vehicle at any given time. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire. only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
WARNING! for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result WARNING!
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
Full Size Spare — If Equipped lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep in-
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the flated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first control.
opportunity.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
5
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph Tire Tread
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when 1 — Worn Tire
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning 2 — New Tire
wheel, no matter what the speed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread Wear Indicators grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
help you in determining when your tires should be re- worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
placed. replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
Life Of Tire Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
including, but not limited to: oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style. Replacement Tires
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures can The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
• Distance driven. replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or Wear Indicator” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
schedule is highly recommended. and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
WARNING! See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six Information” section of this manual for more information
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
serious injury or death. your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that Replacing original tires with tires of a different size 5
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen- ings.
sion dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and brak-
ing of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension com-
ponents. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) Please follow the table below for proper tire size, chain
type, and axle recommendations:
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
Vehicle Axle Recommendations Tire Sizes Chain Class
1500 Models Rear Only P265/70R17 S Class
2500 Models Rear Only LT245/70R17E U Class
LT265/70R18E
LT275/70R18E
2500 Power Wagon Models Rear Only LT285/70R17D U Class
3500 (Single Rear Wheel) Rear Only LT265/70R18E U Class
Models LT275/70R18E
3500 (Dual Rear Wheel) Front/Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
Models
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
CAUTION!
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
following precautions: braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be- rates.
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi- These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
5
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
damaged parts of the device before further use. snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth,
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re- quiet ride.
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). tenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross” Directional Tires — If Equipped
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does For the R/T package with 22” tires and wheels, the
not apply to some directional tires that must not be rotational direction of the tire must be taken into consid-
reversed. eration when rotating the tires. The recommended rotation
pattern for directional tires is shown below.
Tire Rotation
Tire Rotation
Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped • After a tire rotation is completed, as shown below, the
system can auto learn the locations of each sensor ID.
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
Auto learning/localization occurs when the vehicle ig-
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set.
nition status is changed from Off to On and speeds of
To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all four
greater than 5 mph (8km/h) are obtained and remain
tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.
over 5 mph (8km/h) for at about a 15 minute period.
You may need to drive for 20 minutes to account slower
speeds and stops. 5
• If the tires are rotated incorrectly, The auto localization
of the TPIS sensors will fail to locate correctly resulting
in incorrect locations for the pressure values displayed
in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
• 3500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one approved
direction of rotation. This is to accommodate the
asymmetrical design (tread pattern) of the On/Off-
Tire Rotation Road tire and the use of Outline White Letter (OWL)
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure tires.
Information System (TPIS):
• The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses (Continued)
unique sensors in the inner rear wheels to help identify
them from the outer rear wheels, because of this, the
inner and outer wheel locations can’t be switched.
Treadwear
• When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to be The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
remounted on the rim, or installed at a different the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
location, to maintain the correct placement of the tire conditions on a specified government test course. For
on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position on example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
the truck. For example, if the spare is used to replace times as well on the government course as a tire graded
an outer rear tire it will have to be remounted on the 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
rim so that the wheel is dished inward. That way the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
tread design of asymmetrical tires and the white significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
writing of the OWL tires will maintain proper posi- habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
tion. teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
The following tire grading categories were established on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu- and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the performance.
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
WARNING! WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on The temperature grade for this tire is established for
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
peak traction characteristics. ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Temperature Grades
5
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory mended cold placard pressure.
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor- outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
mance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of perfor- after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
mance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
required by law. period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no ciently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Moni-
adjustment for this increased pressure. toring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
pressure loss through the tire. Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
CAUTION!
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
(Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illumi- ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
nates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recom- have been established for the tire size equipped on
mended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system damage may result when using replacement equip-
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitor- ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
ing Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage.
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven • Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
the TPMS to receive this information. come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and function checked.
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a tempera-
ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to (Continued)
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always tire.
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which Premium System
could damage the TPMS sensor. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
NOTE: monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
5
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or readings to the receiver module.
condition.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
while adjusting your tire pressure. maintain the proper pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the The TPMS consists of the following components:
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
• Receiver module
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping • Four TPM sensors
ability. • Various TPMS messages, which display in the instru-
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- ment cluster
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain • TPM Telltale Light
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light.”
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in a
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the graphic display in the instru-
will display a “LOW TIRE” message and a graphic show-
ing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire ment cluster will return to it’s original color, and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The
pressure values in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message will also be displayed. vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” Message

• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles With Non Matching Full Size Spare Or Compact
Spare
• The non matching full size spare or compact spare tire 5
does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will
not monitor the pressure in the non matching full size
spare or compact spare tire.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display • If you install the non matching full size spare or compact
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” switch cycle, the TPM Telltale Light and a “LOW TIRE”
will no longer flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will remain ON and a chime will sound. In
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due display a pressure value in a different color.
to any of the following:
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument
the TPM sensors. cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains ma- for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes
terials that may block radio wave signals. (- -) in place of the pressure value.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and • Four TPM sensors (Single Rear Wheel (SRW) applica-
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the non matching tions)
full size spare or compact spare, the TPMS will update • Six TPM sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) applications)
automatically. In addition, the TPM Telltale Light will
turn OFF and the graphic in the instrument cluster will • Pressure display in the instrument cluster
display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -). The The TPIS system will display all four (Single Rear Wheel
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes (SRW) applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) appli-
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to cations) tire pressure values in the instrument cluster
receive this information. display.
Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) 3500 If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster will
Series Trucks display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a mini-
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Pressure Infor- mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place
mation System (TPIS). of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
transmit tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure longer exists, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will
readings to the receiver module. no longer be displayed, and a pressure value will display
in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire of the following:
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure. • Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
The TPIS consists of the following components: the TPM sensors.
• Receiver module
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains ma- FUEL REQUIREMENTS
terials that may block radio wave signals.
3.6L Engine
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
• Using tire chains on the vehicle. sions regulations and provide optimum
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “Regular”
5
General Information gasoline having a posted octane number
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2
210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the follow- method. The use of higher octane “Pre-
ing conditions: mium” gasoline is not required, as it will not provide any
benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
2. This device must accept any interference received, in- hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera- cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
tion. a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
by the party responsible for compliance could void the engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
user’s authority to operate the equipment. Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine 6.4L Engine
This engines is designed to meet all This engines is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satis- emissions regulations and provide satis-
factory fuel economy and performance factory fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded gaso- when using high quality unleaded gaso-
line having a posted octane number line having a posted octane number
range of 87 to 89 as specified by the range of 87 to 89 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane
“Plus” gasoline is recommended for optimum performance “Plus” gasoline is recommended for optimum performance
and fuel economy. and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider- symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle. ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi- void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air ranty.
quality. E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop- Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
5
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
performance and durability of engine and fuel system ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited War-
components. ranty.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen- the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
ates such as ethanol. • Operate in a lean mode.
CAUTION! • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline • Poor engine performance.

containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these • Poor cold start and cold drivability.
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
damage critical fuel system components, cause emis-
sions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please ob-
serve pump labels as they should clearly communicate if
a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications Materials Added To Fuel
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo- stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
MMT In Gasoline line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
able, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
gasoline is recommended. Visit
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether phragm materials.
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
CAUTION! you.
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s Carbon Monoxide Warnings
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal WARNING!
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. 5
mance and damage the emissions control system.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
oxide poisoning:
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
WARNING!
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning
Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the agent and never use it near an open flame.
other sections of this manual for information on features
that are common between Flexible Fuel and non-Flexible Fuel Requirements
Fuel powered vehicles. If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
CAUTION! fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating be-
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85. tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85) When switching fuel types:
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15% • Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
unleaded gasoline. • Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard start-
ing and/or driveability problems during warm up.
NOTE: Starting
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
rough idle following start up may be experienced even if range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time it
the above recommendations are followed, especially takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C). deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel. 5
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline addi- improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
tive, such as Mopar Injector Cleanup or Techron may be ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
used.
Cruising Range
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experi-
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated enced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and
engine oils. These special requirements are included in the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%,
Mopar engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FCA compared to gasoline operation.
Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Replacement Parts
Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC Ethanol compatible service components are required.
engines.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixtures greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will make it more difficult for your engine to
start under cold conditions, may affect drivability, and
could cause engine damage.
Fuel Filler Cap
ADDING FUEL NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the fuel filler
door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open the fuel door and CAUTION!
remove the fuel cap by turning it counter-clockwise.
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities
into the fuel system.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the “Mal- • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
function Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on. is full.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top • Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on
if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the
gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled. 5
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the WARNING!
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled. Static electricity can cause an ignition of flammable
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce
running. risk of serious injury or death when filling containers:
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a • Always place container on the ground before filling.
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You • Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the when you are filling it.
ground while filling. • Use only approved containers for flammable liquid.
• Do not leave container unattended while filling.
• A static electric charge could cause a spark and fire
hazard.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will dis- rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
play in the instrument cluster telltale display GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
area. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under-
Payload
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the RIGHT The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. all passengers, options and cargo.
VEHICLE LOADING Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
Certification Label
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis- area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar. Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
This label contains the month and year of manufacture, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is cle’s GVWR.
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Tire Size The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
Rim Size vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
listed. specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
5
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
Inflation Pressure weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loading conditions up to full GAWR. all loose items securely before driving.
Curb Weight Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect

on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight the brakes operate.
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded CAUTION!
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
scale before any occupants or cargo are added. or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
Loading
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by vehicle.
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
TRAILER TOWING The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this infor-
mation to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. WARNING!
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) or more,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this it is recommended to use a weight-distributing hitch to
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a
standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control
Common Towing Definitions of your vehicle and cause a collision.
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information: Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and trailer when weighed in combination.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This
includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification La- axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
bel” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all mation.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
WARNING!
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
can result if either rating is exceeded. hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
Tongue Weight (TW)
trailers.
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the 5
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of Weight-Distributing Hitch
the load on your vehicle. A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
Frontal Area
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
maximum width of the front of a trailer. accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
Trailer Sway Control for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control, thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
The trailer sway control is supported by a mechanical telescop- tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
ing link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction asso- positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
ciated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
trailer swaying motions while traveling. are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies configuration/loading to comply with GAWR require-
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to ments.
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability and braking
performance and could result in a collision.
• Weight distributing systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)

3. Under the instrument cluster or touch screen radio
settings, enable jack mode. Jack mode will be canceled
and procedure must be restarted if the vehicle is driven
at speeds above 5mph (8 kmh).
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H1.
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch

(Incorrect)
Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment
Towing With 1500 Air Suspension
1. Set air suspension to normal ride height. No action is
required if already in normal ride height.
Measuring Height (H)
NOTE: The vehicle must remain in the engine run position 5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
with all doors closed while attaching a trailer for proper distribution bars connected.
leveling of the air suspension system.
2. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer on the fender to ground, this is height H2.
(do not connect the trailer).
7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing Towing With 2500/3500 Air Suspension
bars per the manufacturers’ recommendations so that
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer
the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
3+H1 (about 1/3 the difference between H2 and H1
above normal ride height [H1]). NOTE: Normal Ride Height (NRH) or Alternate Trailer
Height (ATH) can be used. The vehicle must remain in the
8. Use the instrument cluster or touch screen radio settings
engine running position while attaching a trailer for proper
and switch off tire jack mode. Make sure the truck
leveling of the air suspension system. It may not be
returns to normal ride height. Preform a visual inspec-
possible to enter Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) while
tion of the trailer and weight distributing hitch to
lightly loaded.
confirm manufacturers’ recommendations have been
met. 2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
9. The truck can now be driven.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
Measurement Example
Example 1500 Height distribution bars connected.
(mm)
H1 925
H2 946
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing
H2-H1 21
bars per the manufacturers’ recommendations so that
(H2-H1)/3 7 the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
(H2-H1)/3 + H1 932 2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
above normal ride height [H1]).
NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with tow haul mode engaged.
6. Preform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight 4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
distributing hitch to confirm manufacturers’ recommen- on the fender to ground, this is height H2.
dations have been met.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing
Example 2500/3500 bars per the manufacturers’ recommendations so that
Measurement Example
Height (mm) the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
H1 1030
above normal ride height [H1]).
H2 1058 5
6. Preform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight
H2-H1 28
distributing hitch to confirm manufacturers’ recommen-
(H2-H1)/2 14 dations have been met.
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
Example 2500/3500
NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing Measurement Example
Height (mm)
H1 1030
Towing With All Other 1500/2500/3500 (Non-Air Suspen- H2 1058
sion)
H2-H1 28
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer (H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
Fifth-Wheel Hitch Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max.
coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle Tongue Weight
in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer Class III Bumper 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) / 500 lbs
with a coupling king pin. Hitch - 1500 Model (226 kg)
Your truck may be equipped with a 5th wheel hitch option. Class IV - 1500 Model 11,000 lbs (4,989 kg) / 1100
Refer to the separately provided 5th wheel hitch safety, lbs (498 kg)
care, assembly, and operating instructions. Class V - 2500/3500 18,000 lbs (8,164 kg) / 1800
Gooseneck Hitch Models lbs (816 kg)
Fifth Wheel - 2500 25,000 lbs (11,339 kg) / 5000
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
Model lbs (2,267 kg)
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted Gooseneck - 2500 20,000 lbs (9,071 kg) /
over the rear axle in the truck bed. Model 4000 lbs (1,814 kg)
Gooseneck Or Fifth 32,000 lbs (14,545 kg) / 6000
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight Wheel - 3500 Model lbs (2,721 kg)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer
should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
hitch for your intended towing condition.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
Ratings) adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-
installed options or dealer-installed options must be con-
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
sidered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses: NOTE: Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/ Information Placard” in “Starting And Operating” for
• ramtruck.ca (Canada) 5
Towing Requirements
• rambodybuilder.com
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
Trailer And Tongue Weight components the following guidelines are recommended:
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your trailer hitch or the weights specified in the informa- CAUTION!
tion that can be found under “Trailer Towing Weights
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)”.
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
Consider the following items when computing the weight or other parts could be damaged.
on the rear axle of the vehicle: • Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
• The tongue weight of the trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
in or on your vehicle loads.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always block
possible: or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer • GCWR must not be exceeded.
and will not shift during travel. When trailering • Total weight must be distributed between the tow
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to ratings are not exceeded:
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and 1. GVWR
have a collision.
2. GTW
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can 3. GAWR
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires. Towing Requirements — Tires
• Safety chains must always be used between your • Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the spare tire.
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for • Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
turning corners. and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operat-
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the ing” for proper tire inflation procedures.
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in • Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
(Continued)
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
CAUTION!
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for the proper inspection If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
procedure. loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Informa- be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
tion” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire re- accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
placement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher effort, and longer stopping distances.
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or 5
GVWR and GAWR limits. vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
WARNING! • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
brake controller is not required.
when you need them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis- • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
tance. When towing you should allow for additional 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front 1,653 lbs (749 kg).
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident. Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Module
(ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic (EOH)
trailer brakes.
NOTE: This module has been designed and verified with The user interface consists of the following:
electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydraulic
Manual Brake Control Lever
systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be compat-
ible with ITBM. Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to activate
power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the
tow vehicle’s brakes. If the manual brake control lever is
activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the
two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is
turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN
setting for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status Indi-
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button cator Light” will not be displayed.
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated
Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-) 3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged in,
the trailer connected message should appear in the
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control power
instrument cluster display (if the connection is not
output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The GAIN
recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will not be
setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and the
to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
correct type of trailer must be selected from the instru-
GAIN ment cluster display options.
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for 4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel 5
the specific towing condition and should be changed as until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter
include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and
“TRAILER TOW”.
weather.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer Brake
Adjusting GAIN
Type appears on the screen.
NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or DOWN
environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type appears on
(30–40 km/h).
the screen.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
condition, functioning normally and properly adjusted.
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
See your trailer dealer if necessary.
squeeze the manual brake control lever completely.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
according to the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn
freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point just
below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer,
trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the
maximum GAIN setting of 10.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH

Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric over Hydrau- Electric over Hydrau-
lic Trailer Brakes lic Trailer Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs
* The suggested selection depends and may change de-
pending on the customer preferences for braking perfor-
mance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road
state may also affect the selection.
Display Messages NOTE:
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument • An aftermarket controller may be available for use with
cluster display. Display messages, along with a single trailers with air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer brake
chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is determined systems. To determine the type of brakes on your trailer
in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or on the and the availability of controllers, check with your
trailer. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under- trailer manufacturer or dealer.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause
damage to the electrical system and electronic modules 5
CAUTION! of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if an aftermar-
ket module is to be installed.
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping (If Equipped)
distance or trailer instability which could result in Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property. stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
WARNING! The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of connector.
trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring
distance or trailer instability which could result in harness.
personal injury.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Towing Tips If you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of
continuous operation, then change the automatic transmis-
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and
sion fluid and filter(s) as specified for ⬙police, taxi, fleet, or
backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy traffic.
frequent trailer towing.⬙ Refer to the “Maintenance Sched-
Automatic Transmission ule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level be-
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid fore towing (6-speed automatic only).
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shift- 5
ing does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode Tow/Haul Mode
or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
Select (ERS) shift control). ing, activate TOW/HAUL mode when driving in hilly
areas, or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic
NOTE: Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower
Range Select (ERS) shift control) on more severe grades.
gear range (using the ERS shift control) while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve per- Speed Control — If Equipped
formance and extend transmission life by reducing exces- • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking. • When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at low you can get back to cruising speed.
speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or below), holding your vehicle
in first gear (using the ERS shift control) can help to avoid • Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
transmission overheating. maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System SNOWPLOW
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat- 1500 Models Only
ing, take the following actions:
NOTE: Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow
City Driving applications.
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmis- WARNING!
sion into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment should
Highway Driving not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
Reduce speed. airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in
the front end structure. The airbags could deploy
Air Conditioning unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision
Turn off temporarily. resulting in serious injury or death.
Air Suspension System

CAUTION!
To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the vehicle,
the air suspension system can be used. Refer to “Air Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can
Suspension System” in “Starting And Operating” for fur- cause damage to the vehicle.
ther information.
NOTE: The vehicle must remain in the engine running WARNING!
position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
air suspension system. affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described
earlier in this manual.
2500/3500 Models Only Before Plowing
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory in- • Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid
stalled option. These packages include components neces- level.
sary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow. • Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tightness.
NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly • Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
recommended that the owner/installer obtain and follow The cutting edge should be ¼ to ½ in (6 cm to 1.2 cm)
the recommendations contained within the current Body above ground in snow plowing position. 5
Builders Guide. See your authorized dealer, installer or
snowplow manufacturer for this information. There are • Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func-
unique electrical systems that must be connected to prop- tioning properly.
erly assure operator safety and prevent overloading ve- Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability
hicle systems.
For Information about snowplow applications visit
www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body Builders
WARNING!
Guide.
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely 1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck should
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision. not exceed two.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described
earlier in this manual. 2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR
should never be exceeded.
CAUTION! 3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of
options or passengers, etc.
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exterior
lamps are not properly installed.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow sys- Operating Tips
tem, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers, op-
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)
tions, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross Vehicle
should be maximum operating speed. The operator should
Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR) ratings.
be familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned. Reduce
These weights are specified on the Safety Compliance
speed and use extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar
Certification Label on the driver’s side door opening.
areas or under poor visibility.
NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting passengers.
General Maintenance
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifications
at the factory without consideration for the weight of the Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset if plow manufacturer’s instructions.
necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery ter-
season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear. minals clean and free of corrosion.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is parked. When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drivetrain
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip- damage, the following precautions should be observed.
ment following the recommendations provided by the • Operate with transfer case in 4LO when plowing small
specific snowplow manufacturer. or congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed
Over The Road Operation With Snowplow Attached 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in 4HI.
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the • Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4LO
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures. range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended
Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.
completely and position it as low as road or surface • Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a practice
operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance of stepping on the brake pedal while shifting the trans-
and allow adequate passing clearance. mission.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF Two-Wheel Four-Wheel Drive Models

The Ground Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT AL- See Instructions
LOWED • Automatic transmission in PARK
• Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEU- 5
TRAL)
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow Front NOT AL- NOT ALLOWED
LOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE: 1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic trans-
• Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed in mission in PARK, manual transmission in gear (not in
Transport mode before tying them down (from the NEUTRAL).
body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “Air Suspen-
sion – If Equipped” for more information. If the vehicle 4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, en- the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
gine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the 5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key fob.
axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these instruc-
tions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss 6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing,
of proper tie-down tension. to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models CAUTION!

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
• Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
will result.
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is al- improper towing is not covered under the New
lowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This Vehicle Limited Warranty.
may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If • Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: leak from the transmission, causing damage to inter-
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure nal parts.
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer • Before recreational towing, the transfer case must be
cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recreational in NEUTRAL. To be certain the transfer case is fully
towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted into in NEUTRAL, perform the procedure outlined under
PARK for recreational towing. Manual transmissions must “Shifting Into NEUTRAL”. Internal transmission
be placed in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational damage will result, if the transfer case is not in
towing. Refer to the following for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL during towing.
NEUTRAL (N) shifting procedure for your vehicle. • Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK, 5
and manual transmissions must be placed in gear
CAUTION! (not in Neutral) for recreational towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
will leak from the transfer case, causing damage to
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
internal parts.
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
transfer case.
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
(Continued)
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) 2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
recreational towing. the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
WARNING!
4. Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU- 5. With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case
TRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the lever into NEUTRAL (N).
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) posi- • With electronic shift transfer case, push and hold the
tion disengages both the front and rear driveshafts transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button. Some models
from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, have a small, recessed “N” button (at the center of the
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or transfer case switches) that must be pushed using a
manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake ballpoint pen or similar object. Other models have a
should always be applied when the driver is not in the rectangular NEUTRAL switch, below the rotary trans-
vehicle. fer case control knob. The NEUTRAL (N) indicator
light will blink while the shift is in progress. The light
CAUTION! will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
NEUTRAL (N) is complete. After the shift is completed
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before NEUTRAL (N) button.
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts. 6. Release the parking brake.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running. Firmly apply the parking brake.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:
transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is • Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that must be met
no vehicle movement. before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If
DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear. any of these requirements are not met before pushing
the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during
10. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply the the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
parking brake. Turn OFF the engine. For vehicles with continuously until all requirements are met or until the 5
Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the ENGINE NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
START/STOP button until the engine shuts off.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
11. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual take place and for the position indicator lights to be
transmission in gear (NOT in Neutral). On 8-speed operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
transmissions the shifter will automatically select shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
PARK when the engine is turned off. will be on or flashing.
12. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode, then cycle the • A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi-
ignition to the RUN mode and back to the OFF mode. cates that shift requirements have not been met.
Remove the key fob from the ignition.
• If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, the engine
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable should be started and left running for a minimum of 60
tow bar. seconds (with all the doors closed) at least once every 24
hours. This process allows the air suspension to adjust
14. Release the parking brake.
the vehicle’s ride height to compensate for temperature
effects.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL (N),
turning the engine OFF is not required, but may be helpful
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed automatic transmis-
normal usage:
sion, the engine must remain running, since turning the
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con- engine OFF will shift the transmission to PARK (and the
nected to the tow vehicle. transmission must be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to
shift out of NEUTRAL).
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Turn the engine OFF. Shift automatic transmission into
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. PARK. On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will auto-
Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. matically select PARK when the engine is turned off.
• With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case 6. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on a manual
lever to the desired position. transmission).
• With electronic shift transfer case with rotary selector
switch, push and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL (N) 7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
button until the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns 8. Start the engine.
off. After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL 9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
(N) button has been released, the transfer case will 10. Release the parking brake.
shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal
• With electronic shift transfer case with push-button
(and clutch pedal on manual transmissions), and check
selector switch, push and hold the switch for the
desired transfer case position, until the NEUTRAL (N) that the vehicle operates normally.
indicator light turns off and the desired position
indicator light turns on.
NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case: • The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
• Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met before take place and for the position indicator lights to be
pushing the button to shift out of NEUTRAL (N), and operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
must continue to be met until the shift has been com- shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
pleted. If any of these requirements are not met before will be on or flashing.
pushing the button or are no longer met during the shift, • A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi-
the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continu- cates that shift requirements have not been met.
ously until all requirements are met or until the button is 5
released.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .566 䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6-SPEED
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Column Shifter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .567
▫ Center Console Shifter — If Equipped . . . . . . . .608 6
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING. . . . . . . . . . . .569
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Jacking And Tire Changing 1500 Series Trucks . .569
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .611
▫ Jacking And Tire Changing 2500 And 3500 Series
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
䡵 HOISTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
䡵 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . .603
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .614
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . . .607
566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the upper
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
switch bank just below the radio.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
impending overheat condition:
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
the Hazard Warning flashers. turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
other motorists. to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even WARNING!
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
may wear down your battery.
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567
Torque Specifications
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your Lug Nut/Bolt Lug Nut/ **Lug Lug Nut/
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull Torque Bolt Type Nut/Bolt Bolt
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air Size Socket
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back Size
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT 130 Ft-Lbs Cone M14 x 22 mm
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine (176 N·m) 1.50
off immediately and call for service. 129 Ft-Lbs Flanged
(175 N·m) 6
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the NOTE: Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali- lug nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being
brated torque wrench using a six sided (hex) deep wall rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts at the interface
socket. between the lug nut/bolt and the washer.
Two-Piece Lug Nut Wheel Mounting Surface

Do not oil wheel studs. Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Jacking And Tire Changing 1500 Series Trucks
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The 6
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
Four And Five Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
WARNING! where it can be raised on a lift.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been a jack.
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
personal injury. tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension Removal Of Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
system, there is a feature which allows the automatic To access the jack and jack tools, you must remove the
leveling to be disabled to assist with changing a tire. plastic access cover located on the side of the front passen-
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature ger’s seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of the
can be activated through the Uconnect system. Refer to cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you to release
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the
Panel” for further information. cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the
seat frame.
feature can be activated through the instrument cluster
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger
seat.
Jack Access Cover

Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt Release the tool bag straps from the jack and remove tools
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide the from bag.
assembly out from under the seat.
Jack And Tool Bag

Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
CAUTION!
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
• The wheel wrench can only be attached to
extension 3.
• When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism be
sure the large flared end opening on extension 1 is
positioned correctly over the winch mechanism ad-
justing nut.
• Damage to the wheel wrench, extensions and winch
mechanism may occur from improper tool assembly.

1 — Extension 1 3 — Extension 3
2 — Extension 2 4 — Wheel Wrench
Assembled For Jack Operation
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or
sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects
in the vehicle may move around with force, resulting
in serious injury.

1 — Extension With Jack Hook 4 — Extension 4
3 — Extension 3
Removing The Spare Tire 2. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until
the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
truck. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension
tube with the curved angle facing away from the
vehicle. Insert the tube through the access hole between
the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
Rotating The Wheel Wrench Handle
Inserting The Jack Extension Tube Into The Access Hole

3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain 4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
access to the spare tire retainer. the retainer at the end of the cable.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out Gaining Access To The Retainer

5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK. On four-wheel drive
vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right front
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch. NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Instructions (1500 Series)
WARNING! • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the facing the ground.
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. 6
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
Jack Warning Label
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
4x2 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location
CAUTION!
There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on lower control arm.
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.

2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the
wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Placement of the jack:
4X2 Front Jacking Location Indicator

When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack under 4x4 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location
the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below. There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the
lower control arm.
4X2 Front Jacking Location

4X4 Front Jacking Location Indicator
When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack under drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the
the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below. axle between the wheel and the shock bracket with the
drive tubes extending to the rear.
4X4 Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location

4x2 and 4x4 Rear Jacking Location Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel
wrench. The tube extension may be used but is not CAUTION!
required. Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing a rear wheel, the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the adjust the jack position as required.
4. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle
WARNING!
until the wheel just clears the surface.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
WARNING! hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Always
stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel in the
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
places provided.
vehicle unstable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to 7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel
remove the tire. blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center
caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage. 6
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped 8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the bottle
end of the wheel nuts toward the wheel. To avoid the jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel) by
risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in
tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been low- order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and
ered. tools as previously described.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the 9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut
torque refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by you authorized dealer or
service station.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare 1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the
ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for conve-
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels cannot
nience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the
be stored under the vehicle because the wheel retainer will
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.
not fit through the wheel pilot hole. Secure the flat tire in
the bed of the truck. Have the flat tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop
could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Reinstalling The Retainer

2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt 3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube with
the retainer at the end of the cable and position it the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
properly across the wheel opening. tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate
and the top of the bumper and into the winch mecha-
nism tube.
Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel

And Positioning It
Wheel Wrench And Jack Extension Tube Assembled And
In Position
4. Rotate the wheel wrench handle clockwise until the Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack
vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be
overtightened. Push against the tire several times to 2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug wrench
ensure it is firmly in place. is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.
Rotating The Wheel Wrench Handle Jack And Tool Bag

winch.
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.
Jack Hold Down Fastener

Jack And Tools Tied NOTE: Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold down
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding location.
the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan.
under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the
Reinstall the plastic cover.
fastener on the floor.
Jacking And Tire Changing 2500 And 3500 Series
Trucks
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
WARNING! where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in a jack.
the original carrier and location. While driving you • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
in the vehicle may move around with force, resulting jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
in serious injury. slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger
seat.
Removal Of Jack And Tools (2500, 3500 Series) Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide the
To access the jack and jack tools, you must remove the
plastic access cover located on the side of the front passen- assembly out from under the seat.
ger’s seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of the
cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you to release
a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the
cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the
seat frame.
6
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools (2500/3500 Series)
Jack Access Cover

Remove the jack and tools from the bracket assembly. Turn There are two ways to assemble the tools:
the jack-turn-screw counterclockwise to release jack from
bracket assembly.

Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
1 — Extension 1 3 — Extension 3
CAUTION!
• The wheel wrench can only be attached to extension
3.
• When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism be
sure the large flared end opening on extension 1 is
positioned correctly over the winch mechanism ad-
justing nut.
• Damage to the wheel wrench, extensions and winch
mechanism may occur from improper tool assembly. 6

1 — Extension With Jack Hook 4 — Extension 4
3 — Extension 3
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or
sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects
in the vehicle may move around with force, resulting
in serious injury.
Removing The Spare Tire 2. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until
the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
truck. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension
tube with the curved angle facing away from the
vehicle. Insert the tube through the access hole between
the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
Inserting The Jack Extension Tube Into The Access Hole

3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain 4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
access to the spare tire retainer. the retainer at the end of the cable.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out Gaining Access To The Retainer

5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK. On four-wheel drive
vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
winch. NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Instructions (2500, 3500 Series)
WARNING! • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the facing the ground.
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. 6
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
Jack Warning Label
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with hub caps/wheel
covers they must be removed before raising the vehicle off
the ground. Refer to ”Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If
Equipped” in this section.
Lug Wrench Adaptor Shown In Jack And Tools Assembly
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle. Lug Wrench Adapter
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.

2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the
wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground. Changing a
dually tire requires the lug wrench adapter.
Lug Wrench Adapter And Wrench Front Jacking Location

3. Placement of the jack: Rear Jacking Location
Front Jacking Location When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive tube
When changing the front wheel, assemble the jack drive to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube.
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension Place the jack under the axle between the spring and the
tube. Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as shock absorber with the drive tubes extending to the rear.
possible with the drive tubes extending to the front.
Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the ve-
hicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle unstable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. On single
rear-wheel (SRW) trucks, install the spare wheel and
wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel nuts
Rear Jacking Location toward the wheel. On 3500 dual rear-wheel models
Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench. (DRW) trucks, if the outer tire is being replaced then
leave the inner wheel on the vehicle. If the inner wheel
CAUTION! is being replaced remove the outer wheel and replace
the inner wheel. The wheel nuts are a two-piece assem-
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
bly with a flat face. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts. To
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
adjust the jack position as required.
fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been
NOTE: If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial lowered.
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack
drive tube in order to lower the jack.
Rear Inner Wheel Proper Placement (Dual Rear Wheel Dual Rear Wheel Placement
Equipped) 6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut
torque refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by you authorized dealer or
service station.
WARNING! WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Always could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have the
stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel in the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
places provided.
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the
7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for conve-
blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center nience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the
caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage. wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
NOTE: If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack
drive tube in order to lower the jack.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
NOTE: Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immedi- Reinstalling The Retainer
ately.
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable and position it
properly across the wheel opening.
Wheel Wrench And Jack Extension Tube Assembled And

In Position
4. Rotate the wheel wrench handle clockwise until the
Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the
And Positioning It vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch
3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube with mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be
the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the overtightened. Push against the tire several times to
tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate ensure it is firmly in place.
and the top of the bumper and into the winch mecha-
nism tube.
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (2500 And 3500
Series)
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tools into bracket assembly. Make
sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack
turn-screw. Snap tools into bracket assembly clips. In-
stall the jack into bracket assembly and turn the jack-
turn-screw clockwise until jack is snug into bracket
assembly.

winch.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly

3. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the storage
position holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the
jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot
engages into the fastener on the floor.
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools (2500/3500 Series)

Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle
off the ground.
Jack Hold Down Fastener
NOTE: Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly CAUTION!
slides into the front hold down location.
Use extreme caution when removing the front and rear
4. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan.
center caps. Damage can occur to the center cap and/or
Reinstall the plastic cover.
the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used. A pulling
motion, not a pry off motion, is recommended to
remove the caps.
For single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the flat blade on You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pull off the
the end of the lug wrench to pull the hub cap off. Insert the wheel skins. Locate the hub cap pull notches (2 notches on
blade end into the pull off notch and carefully pull the hub each cap). Insert the flat tip completely and using a back
cap off with a back and forth motion. and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this
procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must
first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When
hook at one end that will fit in the pull off notch of the rear replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lug nut
hub caps. Position the hook and pull straight out on the bolt circle and strike the high side down with a rubber
ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel skins mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly
can now be removed. For the front hub cap, use the flat seated around the wheel.
blade on the end of the lug wrench to pull the caps off. The
wheel skin can now be removed. HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking
CAUTION! locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking locations.
However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on
• Use a pulling motion to remove the hub cap. Do not
any other parts of the underbody.
use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap,
damage to the hub cap; finish may occur.
• The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two
CAUTION!
pull off notches. Make sure that the hook of the jack Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
before attempting to pull off. may result.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES Preparations For Jump-Start
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
NOTE: The positive battery post may be covered with a
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to gain access
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
to the positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow jump directly off positive post which has a positive (+)
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions. symbol on or around the post.
6
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
Correct Positive Jumping Location

WARNING! WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition establish a ground connection and personal injury
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan could result.
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch Jump-Starting Procedure
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. WARNING!
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
result in personal injury or property damage due to
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
battery explosion.
sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis- CAUTION!

sion into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
accessories. or the discharged vehicle.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park Connecting The Jumper Cables
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
CAUTION!
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses on the
negative (-) post of the booster battery. positive battery terminal. The resulting electrical cur-
rent will blow the fuse.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery the reverse sequence:
and the fuel injection system. Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
6
WARNING! 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post battery.
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
not use any other exposed metal parts. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
NOTE: For trucks equipped with 8-speed automatic trans-
CAUTION!
mission: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting. CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering least one minute after every five rocking-motion
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged
REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or SECOND efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
GEAR and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while
gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine. rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information. Once
the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again
to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels to the vehicle.
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are WARNING!
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
matter what the speed. 6
may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
CAUTION! Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious
injury.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/SECOND GEAR and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive- CAUTION!
train damage may result.
Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow hooks for
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
damage your vehicle.
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6-SPEED
TRANSMISSION
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use one of the
following procedures to temporarily move the gear selec-
tor:
Column Shifter — If Equipped
1. Turn the engine off.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
Gear Selector Override Access Port
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
(ringed circle) on the bottom of the steering column, and
push and hold the override release lever up. Center Console Shifter — If Equipped
1. Turn the engine off.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
gear selector override access cover (located to the right
of the gear selector).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
hole, and push and hold the override release lever TRANSMISSION
down.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will al-
low your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. 6
Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured
vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those
in or around the vehicle.
Gear Selector Override Access Cover

6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is just above
the parking brake release handle, below and to the left
of the steering column.
3. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the Manual
Park Release lever locking tab (just below the middle of
the lever) to the right.
4. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged posi-
tion, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever rearward,
until it locks in place pointing towards the driver’s seat.
Release the locking tab and verify that the Manual Park
Manual Park Release Pull Strap Release lever is locked in the released position.
5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release: NOTE: Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be
placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from
1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the lever.
the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to ⬙Air
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its Suspension⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for more informa-
original position, until the locking tab snaps into place tion. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for
to secure the lever. example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened
to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever
instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause
is locked in its stowed position.
loss of proper tie-down tension.
4. Re-install the access cover. 6
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmis-
sion and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may
also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in
the “Starting And Operating” section.
Towing Wheels 2WD Models 4WD Models

Condition OFF The
Ground
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable: See instructions in “Recreational Tow-
• Transmission in NEUTRAL ing” under “Starting and Operating”
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed • Automatic Transmission in PARK
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance (6–speed • Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT
transmission) NEUTRAL)
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance (8–speed • Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
transmission) • Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Front NOT ALLOWED
Or Dolly Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Tow
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment mode, not the ACC mode.
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
discharged, refer to ”Manual Park Release” or “Gear
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
Selector Override” in this section for instructions on shift-
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
ing the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.
under tow must be observed.
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
CAUTION!
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing. on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel
Vehicle damage may occur. stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position)
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam- ground.
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
Two-Wheel Drive Models
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require- 6
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
is operable, this vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels on
the ground) under the following conditions: Four-Wheel Drive Models
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km) opposite end on a towing dolly.
for 6-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for 8-speed If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case
transmission. is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15 case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK (for
miles (24 km) for 6-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) automatic transmissions) or in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL,
for 8-speed transmission, tow with the rear wheels OFF the for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recreational Towing”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information and EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
detailed instructions. This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
CAUTION! crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
damage to the transmission or transfer case will in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
towing. Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require- on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) func-
tion.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . .617 ▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .629
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . .618 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . .619 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . . .620 ▫ Front Driveshaft Lubrication — 2500/3500
(Four-Wheel Drive Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . .637
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) 7
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .621 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
▫ Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626 ▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From ▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654 Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 ▫ Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped . . . . .675
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662 ▫ Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
▫ Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
▫ Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park And
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
Turn — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
▫ Fog Lamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
▫ Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Battery
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (6-Speed Trans Only) 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (2500/3500 Models Only)
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Battery
1 — Coolant Pressure Bottle 6 — Battery

2 — Transmission Dipstick 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Solvent
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Air Cleaner Filter
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic trans- information related to the performance of your emissions
mission control systems. When these systems are operating controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within service of your vehicle and emissions system.
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
WARNING!
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It • ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, • If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
CAUTION! device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
further damage to the emission control system. It vehicle control could occur that may result in an
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The accident involving serious injury or death.
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests • Access, or allow others to access, information
can be performed. stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running, information.
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required. For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Mul-
timedia”.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, or recently had a dead battery or a battery
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed,
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will dis-
play in the instrument cluster telltale display Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
area. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under- can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the SELECT ing:
button to turn off the message. If the problem continues,
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON mode, but do not crank or
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. 7
start the engine.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition to the ON mode, you
PROGRAMS will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an come on as part of a normal bulb check.
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
happen:
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction to being fully illuminated until you cycle the ignition
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on OFF or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
ready for testing. to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully REPLACEMENT PARTS
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi- Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled main-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s tenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
station. use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
indicate that the system is now ready. which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
procedure yourself.
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine penalties being assessed against you.
running.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Engine Oil
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance Checking Oil Level
services determined by the engineers who designed your
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
vehicle.
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
which may require servicing or replacement in the future. minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
CAUTION! Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick.
repairs and service when necessary could result in 7
Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom
more costly repairs, damage to other components or of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately safe zone on these engines.
have potential malfunctions examined by an autho-
rized dealer or qualified repair center.
CAUTION!
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that
protect the performance and durability of your vehicle Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil
and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
use chemical flushes in these components as the engine.
chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, or
air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the speci-
fied fluid for the flushing procedure.
Change Engine Oil American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa- This symbol means that the oil has been
tion. certified by the American Petroleum In-
stitute (API). The manufacturer only rec-
1500 Models Only
ommends API Certified engine oils.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
CAUTION!
2500 – 3500 Models Only Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter- covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engines (1500 Models
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern Only)
for fleet customers. Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Engine Oil Selection Standard MS-6395 or equivalent Pennzoil or Shell Helix is
recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
economy.
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 6.4L Engine
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on Use Mopar SAE 0W-40 engine oil approved to FCA Mate-
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- rial Standard MS-12633 such as Pennzoil Ultra equivalent
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- is recommended for all operating temperatures.
tion.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
NOTE: Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
Material Standard MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available. ment” illustration in this section.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
(1500/2500/3500 Models)
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number 7
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material should not be used.
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
Synthetic Engine Oils
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
fuel economy. mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended followed.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart- Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
ment” illustration in this section. certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
WARNING!
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service sta- backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
tion or governmental agency for advice on how and where cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
Engine Oil Filter hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
every engine oil change. personal injury.
Engine Oil Filter Selection Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter. The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters should be used to assure most efficient service. filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
recommended.
Replacement
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main- find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change
tenance intervals. your air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover.
7
6.4L Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Spring Clips
3.6L/5.7L Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose
3 — Spring Clips
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter. 3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly

1 — Air Cleaner Cover
Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter 1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation

NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
locating tabs. run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
the housing assembly.
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon- 7
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me- Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
chanic. Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs) Maintenance-Free Battery
• Belt slips Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct posi-
nance required.
tion on pulley)
• Belt broken (identify and correct problem before new WARNING!
belt is installed)
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
for damage and proper alignment. large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced further information.
at an authorized dealer. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION! WARNING!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
battery that the positive cable is attached to the proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
posts and free of corrosion. Warranty Information Book for further warranty
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the information.
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or 7
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage. damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
Air Conditioner Maintenance done by an experienced technician.
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the CAUTION!
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If Cabin Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
Equipped Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- tenance intervals.
carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-saving product. However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser- WARNING!
vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
compressor oil and refrigerants. blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf — If may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
Equipped personal injury.
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoole- The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
fine HFO that is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
(Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer replace the filter:
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
2. With the glove compartment door open, remove the 3. There are glove compartment travel stops on both sides
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by of the glove compartment door, push inward on both
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compart- sides of the glove compartment to release the glove
ment door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment door compartment travel stops.
and release into dash panel.
Glove Compartment
Right Side Of Glove Compartment 1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether 2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door 3 — Glove Compartment Door
4. Disengage the glove compartment door from its hinges
by opening the glove compartment past the travel stop
and pulling it toward you.
5. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the finger tabs
on each end of the filter cover.
Finger Tabs
Filter Cover
7
Finger Tab Cabin Air Filter
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out of 7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter
the housing. pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, press on each end until you hear an audible click.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment on the hinges.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment

Glove Compartment Installation 1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
9. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall the glove 2 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
compartment past the travel stops by pushing in on the
glove compartment sides. NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
10. Reattach the glove compartment tension tether by
inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and
sliding the clip away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
Front Driveshaft Lubrication — 2500/3500
(Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)
Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil
change.
7
Double Cardan Joint
1 — Double Cardan Joint
2 — Grease Fitting
3 — Exploded View – Grease Fitting
Front Drive Shaft Double Cardan Joint

Body Lubrication
The grease fitting is located at the rear of the front
driveshaft, near the centering mechanism of double cardan Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
joint. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
maintenance intervals. Use Mopar Type MS-6560 (lithium- tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
based grease), or equivalent. lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
also be given to hood latching components to ensure mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
proper function. When performing other underhood ser- water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
should be cleaned and lubricated. The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small are experienced. This inspection should include the follow-
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock ing points:
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. • Wear Or Uneven Edges
Windshield Wiper Blades • Foreign Material
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the • Hardening Or Cracking
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations • Deformation Or Fatigue
of salt or road film. If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
dry windshield.
CAUTION!
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position. up the locking tab.
Windshield Wiper Arm Wiper Locking Assembly

1 — Wiper 1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab 2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the arm 5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
and use one finger push the release tab toward the blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
wiper arm. with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the
wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade
down toward the base of the wiper arm and away from
the J hook in the end of the wiper arm).
Wiper Disengaging
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Wiper
3 — Release Tab Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the 2 — Locking Tab
wiper arm. 3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.

Installing The Front Wipers exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
in the full up position.
WARNING!
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open. Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into must be exercised when filling or working around the
the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in washer solution.
the wiper blade under the locking tab.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
until it is latched (engagement will be accompanied by 7
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield
an audible click). Fold down the latch release tab and washer solution used with water as directed on the con-
snap it into its locked position. tainer, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass. avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator anti- system.
freeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance. or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
CAUTION!
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri- and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cation or oil change. Replace as required. cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
WARNING! vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
vehicle.
tion.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
materials that can burn. Such materials might be will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning Cooling System
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the WARNING!
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
should be obtained immediately. coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage: open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in the radiator is hot.
motion.
Engine Coolant Checks 7
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle. Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C
or malfunctioning operating conditions. condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation
of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water
from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
Cooling System — Drain Flush And Refill freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze). MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main- • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
tenance intervals. coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
Selection Of Coolant rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
the radiator.
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
CAUTION! Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than freeze) is not recommended.
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
(Continued)
Adding Coolant • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
cooling system.
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this NOTE:
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use • It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to level of protection against freezing according to the
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
Please review these recommendations for using Organic operated.
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
7
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 to be added to the system, please contact your local
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive authorized dealer.
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Mate- • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
rial Standard MS.90032. mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) sible.
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance.
Cooling System Pressure Cap Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
expansion bottle. your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
(antifreeze) in open containers or allow it to remain in
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
WARNING! spills immediately.
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Checking Coolant Level — 3.6L and 5.7L Engines
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be between the ADD and SAFE range on
the dipstick.
To check the coolant level:
1. Open the coolant reservoir.
7
Coolant Reservoir Dipstick
3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine
coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
Opening The Coolant Reservoir the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reservoir
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
neck.
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” range on the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
bottle when the engine is cold. needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no
need to remove the cap unless checking for coolant freeze • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating for leaks.
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
checked once a month. When additional engine coolant minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
(antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
Points To Remember ponents.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when condenser clean.
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
freeze) to enter the radiator.
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
should be conducted.
to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
WARNING! taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
WARNING!
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible 7
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
brake damage. You would not have your full braking “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
capacity in an emergency. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
Brake Fluid Level Check mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked vehicle is also identified on the original factory
when performing under the hood service or immediately if installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure. • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reser- in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
voir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
“MAX” mark and a “MIN” mark. The fluid level must be a open container absorbs moisture from the air
kept within these two marks. Do not add fluid above the resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap.
(Continued)
For 1500 Model axles, the fluid level should be even with
the bottom of the fill hole (within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) of edge
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak- of hole) for the FDU215 HD front axle and C235FE rear
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could axle.
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in For all 2500/3500 Model axles, the fluid level should be 1/4
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the 9.25
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage in front and 3/4 in ± 1/4 in (19 mm ± 6.4 mm) on 10.5 in
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to rear axles. The 11.5 in rear axle level should be 1/4 in ± 1/4
avoid its contact with these surfaces. in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate Drain And Refill
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
This could result in a collision. tenance intervals.
Lubricant Selection
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintain- components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
ing Your Vehicle” for further information. This inspection encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
should be made with the vehicle in a level position. require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials Fluid Level Check
1500 Model rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug.
Differential require that 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar Limited Slip The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler
Additive be added to the gear lubricant. Refer to “Fluids, plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Automatic Transmission
Vehicle” for further information. The Mopar Limited Slip
Additive should be added to the gear lubricant whenever Selection Of Lubricant
a fluid change is made to an axle equipped with a Limited It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
Slip Differential. ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
2500/3500 Model axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limited only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
slip oil additive (friction modifiers). to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section 7
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
NOTE: When refilling an axle with a Limited Slip Differ- transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
ential, (which requires a Limited Slip Additive), the Lim- mended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any
ited Slip Additive should be added before the gear lubri- transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
cant is added to insure proper additive fill.
Transfer Case CAUTION!
Drain And Refill Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main- er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
tenance intervals. transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
Lubricant Selection filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genu-
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main- ine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Special Additives If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
damage.
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes CAUTION!
for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed transmissions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
affect seals. may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
CAUTION!
Fluid Level Check — Six-Speed Transmission
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo- It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle at normal operating temperature (170-180°F / 77-82°C).
Limited Warranty. This normally occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of
driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot
Fluid Level Check — Eight-Speed Transmission be held comfortably between the fingertips. You can read
the transmission sump temperature in the instrument
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
cluster screen (refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” for
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
further information).
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check
your transmission fluid level using special service tools.
Use the following procedure to check the transmission 7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
fluid level properly: both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
1. Monitor the transmission temperature using the instru-
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if
ment cluster display, and operate the vehicle as required
the actual level is at or above the hole. The fluid level
to reach the normal operating temperature. If the trans-
should be between the “HOT” (upper) reference holes
mission is not functioning properly, or the vehicle
on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the
cannot be driven, see the NOTE and CAUTION below
fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube to
about checking the fluid level at colder temperatures.
bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. Use ONLY
2. Park the vehicle on level ground. the specified fluid (see ⬙Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts⬙ for fluid specifications). After adding any quan-
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60 7
tity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait a minimum of
seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of this
two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmis-
procedure.
sion before rechecking the fluid level.
4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
pedal.
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be be-
5. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear tween the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick with
position (allowing time for the transmission to fully the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only use the COLD region
engage in each position), ending with the transmission of the dipstick as a rough reference when setting the fluid
in PARK. level after a transmission service or fluid change. Re-check
the fluid level, and adjust as required, once the transmis-
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
sion reaches normal operating temperature.
seated.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
CAUTION!
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
If the fluid temperature is below 50 °F (10 °C) it may nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until the sembled for any reason.
temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate Fluid And Filter Changes — Six Speed Transmission
reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the
fluid. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
8. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks. Release the park-
In addition, change the fluid and filter(s) if the fluid
ing brake.
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmis-
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the sion is disassembled for any reason.
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal
for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
seated position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
dipstick tube.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
Fluid And Filter Changes — Eight-Speed passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
Transmission trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
of the vehicle.
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis- Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
tance built into your vehicle. paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
What Causes Corrosion? • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
CAUTION!
The most common causes are:
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
• Stone and gravel impact. metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) 7
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Special Care
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive near
Washing the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle month.
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated open.
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
Remover to remove. touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
owner. to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed. NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
or stone shields behind each wheel. surface.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as CAUTION!

possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle. Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam- CAUTION!
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently dam- this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
age this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
Vehicle Limited Warranty. ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
CAUTION! required to maintain this finish. 7
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may Equipped
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
a clean, dry towel.
lent is recommended.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner
WARNING!
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
protectants on Stain Repel products. areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Interior Care
CAUTION!
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting. • Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
upholstery. • Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular • Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and damage to the seat may result.
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Cleaning Headlights
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
than glass headlights.
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
maintain the original condition. different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
by rinsing. cloth.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Glass Surfaces Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type damage can also weaken the fabric.
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or 7
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
that may scratch the elements. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning
directly on the mirror. loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a wet soft
cloth until all residue is removed.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray-On
WARNING!
Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
loose dirt and debris.
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not 2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies cloth or brush.
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar Spray-On
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or sponge and
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold Tonneau wipe over the entire surface of the truck bedliner.
cover, use Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and
Mopar Leather and Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant. WARNING!
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped Do not use silicon-based protection products to clean
your bedliner. Silicon-based products can become slip-
During ownership, the shine and luster of the Spray-On
pery and may result in personal injury.
Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty
hauling and hard water stains. Weathering and UV exposure Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to many dif-
will lead to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss over time. ferent types of chemicals (including gasoline, oil, hydraulic
To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On Bed- fluids) for short periods of time. If a spill occurs on your
liner, the manufacturer recommends you periodically rinse Spray-On Bedliner, rinse the truck out as soon as possible
all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your truck at to avoid permanent damage.
least twice per year using the Mopar Spray-On Bedliner
Conditioner available at your local authorized dealer.
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner FUSES
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a Spray-On
Bedliner. One common condition is when loading a heavy
WARNING!
pallet and dragging that pallet across the floor of the bed. • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
If a nail or sharp point is exposed under the weight of the priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While not covered by the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
your new vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
metal exposed by the scratch is required. To repair a tear or fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
gouge, follow the directions provided in the Mopar Quick to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
Repair Kit. injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is 7
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the
following chart.
Power Distribution Center Location

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 80 Amp Black – Rad Fan Control Module – If Equipped
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan – If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension – If
Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
Pump
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid

F08 20 Amp Blue (1500 – Emissions Diesel – If Equipped
LD/Cummins Die-
sel)
F09 40 Amp Green (Spe- – Diesel Fuel Heater – If Equipped
cial Services Vehicle
& Cummins Diesel)
F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
F10 50 Amp Red – Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2 – If
Equipped with Stop/Start
7
F11 30 Amp Pink – Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If
Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3 / Power Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4 / Interior Lighting
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart Bar – If Equipped
F19 20 Amp Blue (1500 – SCR – If Equipped
LD Diesel)
30 Amp Pink (Cum-
mins Diesel)
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F21 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module

F22 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module
30 Amp Pink (Cum-
mins Diesel)
F23 30 Amp Pink – Body Controller #1 / Interior Lighting
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F26 30 Amp Pink – Antilock Brakes / Stability Control Module /
Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle
F31 30 Amp Pink (1500 – Urea Heater Control – If Equipped
LD Diesel)
F32 – – Spare Fuse
F33 20 Amp Blue – Special Services Vehicle Only
F34 30 Amp Pink – Vehicle System Interface Module #2 – If
Equipped
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof – If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster – If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – Cummins Diesel Fuel Heater #2 – If
Equipped

F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115V AC – If Equipped
F39 20 Amp Blue – Power Outlet – Special Services Only
F41 – 10 Amp Red Active Grill Shutter – If Equipped
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitter – If Equipped
F49 – 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster (Except Fleet Ve-
hicles)
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module – If 7
Equipped
F51 – 10 Amp Red Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition
(Instrument Panel Cluster – Fleet Vehicles
Only)
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Diesel Content – If Equipped
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Transmission
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare Fuse
F59 – 10 Amp Red SCR Relay – If Equipped

F60 – 15 Amp Blue Underhood Lamp
F61 – 10 Amp Red (1500 PM Sensor – If Equipped
LD Diesel & Cum-
mins Diesel)
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Cummins
Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
F65 – – Spare Fuse
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches /
Rain Sensor
F67 – 10 Amp Red CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free Module –
If Equipped
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Mod SCR 12V (Cummins Diesel) – If
Equipped
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Motor
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier
F72 – 10 Amp Red PCM – If Equipped
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump (HD Only) – If
Equipped

F74 – 20 Amp Yellow (Gas Brake Vacuum Pump Gas/Diesel – If
Engine & 1500 LD Equipped
Diesel)
F75 – 10 Amp Red Coolant Temperature Valve Actuator
F76 – 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes / Electronic Stability Control
F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Dis-
connect Module
F78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module / Electric Power
Steering
7
F79 – 15 Amp Blue Clearance Lights
F80 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module / Cruise
Control
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank / Instrument Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension – If Equipped / Trailer Tow
/ Steering Column Control Module
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster

F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear Seats) Customer Select-
able
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter / Transfer Case Module
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Park Assist
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch
F97 – 25 Amp Clear Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel
– If Equipped
F98 – 25 Amp Clear Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters – If Equipped
F101 – 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror / Smart High Beams
– If Equipped
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel / Center
Console)
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
CAUTION!
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
• When installing the power distribution center cover, conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi- fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
water to get into the power distribution center and of compressor damage when the system is started again.
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The REPLACEMENT BULBS
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base.
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a 7
problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
VEHICLE STORAGE
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we Dome Lamp 7679
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize
the drain on your vehicle’s battery: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number
Bulb Number LED Center High LED (Serviced at autho-
Base Quad Headlamp – H11LL Mounted Stop Lamp rized dealer)
Low Beam (CHMSL)/Cargo Lamp
Base Quad Headlamp – 9005LL Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA
High Beam Base Rear Tail/Turn and 3157K
Front Turn Signal Lamp 3157NA Stop Lamp
(Base Quad Headlamp) Premium Rear Tail/Turn LED (Serviced at autho-
Premium Bi Halogen Pro- 9005Sl+ and Stop Lamp rized dealer)
jector Headlamp - Low Premium Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Beam Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker 194
Premium Bi Halogen Pro- 9005LL Lamp
jector Headlamp - High Side Marker Lamps (Dual 194
Beam Rear Wheels)
Front Turn Signal Lamp LED (Serviced at autho- Backup Lamp 921
(Premium Headlamp) rized dealer)
Rear License Plate Lamp 194
Fog Lamp (Horizontal 9145
shape)
Fog Lamp (Vertical shape) 9006
Center High Mounted 921K
Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Rear Cargo Lamp 921
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam
Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park And
Turn — If Equipped
1. Open the hood. 7
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. Headlamp Assembly Attachment Screw Locations
3. Remove the six plastic push-in fasteners that secure the 7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
upper radiator seal to the grille support and both fender wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the
ledges. access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield.
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this
4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that secure the access hole.
upper radiator seal to the radiator.
8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house splash
5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle. shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to
6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment screws. disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front
lamp unit housing.
CAUTION!
• Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for replace-
ment. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat
and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or the
lamp wiring.
NOTE: There are access covers over both headlamp bulb

access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if
Slide Lock equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after the bulb
has been replaced.
9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboard
edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disen- Fog Lamps — If Equipped
gage the ball stud from the plastic grommet.
1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access the
10. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the back of the front fog lamp housing.
bulb socket.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector from
11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary. the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise ¼ turn to unlock the
bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far enough
CAUTION!
to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard side of
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with the lamp housing from the two plastic snap post retain-
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily ers in the outer box side panel.
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps

1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed sheet
metal.
Pulling Out The Tail Lamp

3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb
socket.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1/4 turn to
unlock it from the housing.
Tail Lamp Screw Locations
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wiring
CAUTION!
harness to the body.
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing.

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With
Cargo Lamp
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to the
body as shown.
CHMSL Connector Location

3. Turn the desired bulb socket ¼ turn and remove the
socket and bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations

Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.
7
CHMSL Bulb And Socket
CAUTION!
Removing Rear Screw From Clearance Lamp
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
• Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
2. Rotate the bulb socket ¼ turn and pull it from the lamp 3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace.
assembly.
Removing The Bulb From The Bulb Socket

Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) — If Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped Equipped
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access to
the bulb sockets.
Side Marker Lamp Locations

Screw Locations 1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly.
2. Turn the socket ¼ turn counterclockwise to access the 2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
bulb.
3. Turn the socket ¼ turn counterclockwise and remove
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket. from assembly to access the bulb.
4. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and 4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.
housing.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and
housing.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 32 Gallons 121 Liters
2500/3500 Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters
2500/3500 Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
6.4L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 0W-40 engine oil meeting 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all
operating temperatures.)
Cooling System
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Mate-
rial Standard MS.90032.)
U.S. Metric
5.7L Engine – 1500 Models (We recommend you use Mopar 18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the re-
quirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
5.7L Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recommend you use Mopar 18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
6.4 Liter Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recommend you use Mopar 16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters
7
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-6395 may
be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 6.4L For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that
meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. The manufacturer
recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent Mopar engine oil
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all
operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar brand Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.

Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) 87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
Engine – If Equipped
Fuel Selection – 5.7L/6.4L Engines 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam- rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and 7
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ- may plug the radiator.
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti- propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti- Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is freeze) is not recommended.
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
(Continued)
Chassis
Automatic Transmission – Eight-Speed Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
Automatic equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Automatic Transmission – Six-Speed Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid
Automatic with Gasoline Engine (For may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend
Diesel Engine see Diesel Supplement) Mopar ATF+4 fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid.
Front Axle – 1500 Four-Wheel Drive We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Models
Rear Axle – 1500 Models We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-90
(MS-A0160). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml)
Mopar Limited Slip Additive (MS-10111).
Front and Rear Axle – 2500/3500 Models We recommend you use SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant.
Limited slip additive is not required for Limited-Slip Rear Axles.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available,
then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir – 2500/3500 We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4 or Mopar ATF+4
Models Automatic Transmission Fluid.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 ▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
8
684 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 1500 Models Only
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
scheduled maintenance. hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service 2500 – 3500 Models Only
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as Severe Duty All Models
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE: Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a is operated predominantly at idle, or only very low engine
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 685
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
• Check engine oil level Change Indicator System:
• Check windshield washer fluid level • Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
system turns on.
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake required.
master cylinder, power steering (2500/3500 Models
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
Only) and automatic transmission (six-speed only) and
with dipstick.
fill as needed
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights park brake. 8
Maintenance Chart • Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Required Maintenance • Inspect exhaust system.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
for required maintenance. off-road conditions.
• Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4)
models only).
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
X X X X X X X
and replace if necessary.
1500 Models:
Inspect the front and rear axle sur-
faces. If gear oil leakage is suspected,
check the fluid level. If using your ve- X X X X X
hicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing, change axle
fluid.
2500/3500 Models:
Inspect the front and rear axle sur-
faces. If gear oil leakage is suspected,
check the fluid level. If using your ve- X X X X X X X
hicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing, change axle
fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
X X X X X X X
necessary.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 687
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Adjust parking brake as necessary. X X X X X X X

Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X 8
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles X X
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter(s) (six-speed automatic only),
X X
if using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change automatic transmission fluid
X
and filter(s) (six-speed automatic only).
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change
for any of the following: police, taxi, X X
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Change the transfer case fluid. X

Inspect and replace PCV valve if nec-
X
essary.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
WARNING! could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
• You can be badly injured working on or around a an accident.
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
(Continued)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690 Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .693
▫ FCA USA LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .691 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .693
9
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .691 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .691
690 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
YOUR VEHICLE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare For The Appointment interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring the
right papers with you, as well as your warranty folder. All Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history, as this concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
can often provide a clue to the current problem. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
Prepare A List
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the timely manner.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service advisor know. service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
Be Reasonable With Requests
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
If you list a number of items and you must have your general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the They want to know if you need assistance.
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 691
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center In Mexico Contact
should include the following information: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
• Owner’s name and address
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Mexico, D. F.
• Authorized dealer name
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA USA LLC Customer Center
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 21–8004
P.O. Box 191857
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Tel.: (787) 782-5757 9
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
Fax: (787) 782-3345
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
Impaired (TDD/TTY) er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
(800) 387-9983 French).
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
ments.
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator. We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
Service Contract
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu- concerns.
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 693
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
WARNING!
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo- If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con- Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
tained in vehicles and certain products of component FCA US LLC.
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
reproductive harm. a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
WARRANTY INFORMATION in individual problems between you, your authorized
See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and dealer or FCA US LLC.
9
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
vehicle and market. Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
MOPAR PARTS
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail- Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for other information about motor vehicle safety from
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at http://www.safercar.gov.
its best.
In Canada Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
should contact the Customer Service Department imme- charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
defect to the Canadian government should contact problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http:// the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/. ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Owner’s Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master- These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
Service Manuals starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor- dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
mation that students and professional technicians need in Call toll free at:
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A • 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, • 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
INDEX
10
696 INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . .337, 339
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631, 632
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323, 336, 631
Adjust Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427, 433
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118, 119 Alarm, Panic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118, 119 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 241
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Air Bag Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644, 678
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65, 614 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Automatic Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 237 Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . .336
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .626 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 654
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652, 654
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338, 632 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651, 652
INDEX 697
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651, 682 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 669
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384, 394
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Cab Top Clearance Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650, 682 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Back-Up Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Caps, Filler
Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242, 630 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 531
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Body Builders Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637 Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Brake Control System, Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 10
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649, 682 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .621
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482, 649 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Child Restraints
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238, 240 Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669, 671 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83, 85
698 INDEX
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . . .81 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . .644, 678, 680
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . . .73 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .70 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261, 262
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Climate Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Cold Weather Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692 Dipsticks
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .646 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Disabled Vehicle Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 Disposal
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643, 647, 648 Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Door Ajar Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647, 648 Door Locks
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
INDEX 699
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Emergency, In Case Of
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Driving Emission Control System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .621
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618, 619
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Dual Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519, 567 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . .617, 618, 619
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 531
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . .406, 411, 417, 422 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527, 678
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 10
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623, 678, 680
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Electronic Range Select (ERS). . . . . . . . . . . .382, 390, 399 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624, 678
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .152 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . . .243 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Emergency Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624, 625
700 INDEX
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . .65, 614 Fluid Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529, 532 Fluid Level Checks
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 531 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 641 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . .680
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 672
Fold Flat Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Filters Four-Way Hazard Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626 Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338, 632 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626, 680 Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Flashers Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 144, 260 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582, 598 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Flexible Fuel Vehicles Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529, 532
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527, 680
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527, 678
INDEX 701
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Fuel, Flexible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . .145
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . .172, 178 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536, 621 Head Restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 198
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385, 394 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . . .145
Gear Select Lever Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608 Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Hitches
Gross Axle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538 Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Guide, Body Builders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 10
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Hub Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 15
Hazard Warning Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
702 INDEX
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 109 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . .35, 289, 309
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242, 260 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Instrument Cluster Display Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Instrument Panel And Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
Integrated Trailer Brake Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Lane Change And Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 669
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569, 586 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 135
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 237
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Key Fob Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238, 240
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .25 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . .22 Cap Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Key-In Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 370 Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 143, 172
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289, 309 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261, 262
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
INDEX 703
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Loading Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 672 Load Shed
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 142, 143, 172 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .246 Low Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630 10
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669, 671 Maintenance Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . .249, 521 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .246, 621
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Manual, Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 Manual Transmission
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 144, 260, 671, 673 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .242, 260 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459, 651 Memory Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
704 INDEX
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626, 680
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624, 678
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 109 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624, 625, 678
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622, 693 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Navigation System (Uconnect GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391, 400
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391, 400
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . .446, 462 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . .5, 694
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . .446, 462
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623, 680 Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 162
INDEX 705
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Pretensioners
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Programmable Electronic Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Programming Key Fobs (Remote Keyless Entry). . . . . .22
Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203, 205, 219
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . .501, 502 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Power Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . .644, 646
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662 Radio Frequency
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 28, 31, 38
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . .182, 187 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Rain Sensitive Wiper System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Ramp Travel Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478, 479, 480 Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 10
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 162
Power Seats Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 126
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118, 119 Rear Window, Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118, 119 Reclining Rear Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . .560
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . .562
706 INDEX
Reformulated Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Schedule, Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
Remote Control Seat Belt
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . .48
Remote Keyless Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 23 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . . . .320 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Remote Starting Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . .291, 311 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291, 311 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 96
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . . .48
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 46
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
INDEX 707
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117, 118, 119, 124 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117, 118, 119 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 144, 260
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358, 359
Folding Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Sliding Rear Window
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 126 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 241 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510, 511, 512
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
Sentry Key Speed Control
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690 Stabilizer/Sway Bar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 10
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692 Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 369, 370
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 384, 394 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
708 INDEX
Steering Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478, 479, 480 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 506
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519, 567
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .320 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506, 510
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338, 669 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 503
Suspension, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427, 433 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . .336 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496, 506
Tilt Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510, 512
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . .501, 502 Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 506, 510, 520 Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
INDEX 709
Tonneau Cover Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 384, 394, 651
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393, 402 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538, 611 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 260, 671, 673
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Uconnect
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . .291, 311
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281, 291, 311
Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538 Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 Uconnect Access
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Uconnect Settings
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . .35, 289, 309 10
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . .35, 289, 309
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289, 309
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . .406, 411, 417, 422 Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . .173, 174, 176, 177
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
710 INDEX
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503, 536 Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338, 669 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624, 625 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145, 146, 641
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145, 641
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693 Wiper Blade Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146, 641 Wipers, Intermittent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
Wheel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Rigging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 182
Window Fogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA features and equipment that are either standard or op- INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a EQUIPMENT
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.
accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle. equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- The positive power connection should be made directly
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
normal may require special precautions.
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- The negative power connection should be made to body
portation. factured. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the
WARNING! vehicle’s electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. vehicles so equipped.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
2017 RAM TRUCK 1500/2500/3500
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
RAM TRUCK
2017
1500/2500/3500
17_dsdjd2_om_en_usc
OWNER’S MANUAL
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Seventh Edition v1
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Printed in U.S.A.

2017 RAM 1500-2500-3500 Truck Owner&#39;s Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2017 RAM 1500-2500-3500 Truck Owner&#39;s Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2017 RAM TRUCK 1500/2500/3500

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 3

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 4

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 5

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 6

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 7

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 8

Vehicle Identification Number

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Key Fob

Keyless Push Button Ignition Key Fob

Keyless Push Button Ignition

Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (WIN)

Key Fob Emergency Key

Emergency Key Removal

Emergency WIN Key Removal

Separating WIN Key Fob Case

Remove Screw From Key Fob Case

Child Lock Control

Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt

Inserting Latch Plate

First Row Center Lap Belt Operating Instructions —

Front Air Bags

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

Recommended Type of Child Re-

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Crew/Mega Cabs 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Regular Cab Tether Anchorages

Quad Cab/Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking

Regular Cab Tether Anchorages

Mega Cab Tether Anchorages

Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In Raised

Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And

Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position

Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Power Mirror Controls

Trailer Towing Position

Front Heated Seats

Dump Feature (Manual Recline Seat Only) —

40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped

Front Head Restraints

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED Memory Seat Buttons

Headlight Switch Location

Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light

Front Courtesy/Reading Lights

Cargo Lights Button

Turn Signal Lever

High/Low Beam Switch

TILT STEERING COLUMN WARNING!

DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will WARNING!

Slow Tone Fast Tone

Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light

2017 RAM 1500-2500-3500 Truck Owner's Manual

2017 RAM 1500-2500-3500 Truck Owner's Manual